Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 462

Marine

Drafting
User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Limited

Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from
viruses.

1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data
created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in
contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.

1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's
claim is brought.

1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.

1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.

Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it
(including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied
with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is
made.

The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this
publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written
permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.

The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.

Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall not
be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results from
a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.

AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.

Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of
the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.

AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).

The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or
logo belongs to its respective owner.
Marine Drafting User Guide

Revision Sheet

Date Version Comments / Remarks


September 2011 12.1 Extensive changes/updates throughout the User Guide.

Chapter A1.7.21 - Unit System, default variables have been


removed
September 2011 12.1 New Chapter in 3. Utilities: 3.4 SY013 - Store Drawings in the
PADD database.
September 2011 12.1 New function in Operators Instructions; Design Area Docs.
January 2012 Copyright added to all pages.
December 2011 12.1.2 Operator’s Instructions update to 2D Restrictions. Update to
Label.
December 2011 12.1.2 Changes to chapter 3, Utilities.
January 2012 12.1.2 Chapter A3 Preview Images in Appendices removed.
January 2012 12.1.2 New Multi-row dimension texts added in Operator’s Instructions
Drafting:
#/
New-line separator
January 2012 12.1.2 Chapter utilities, information about drawing forms required by
SB028 and SB029 has been added.
February 2012 Removed Tribon.
February 2012 12.1.SP3 Operator’s Instructions change to Modify/Dimension multiple
choice menu, Transform Text to Move Dimension Text.
October 2012 12.1.SP3 Model Viewing and General Drafting; new 2.7 Change
Highlighting
October 2012 12.1.SP3 New Chapter in A12 System Layers; A.12.4 Outfitting Layers
October 2012 12.1.SP3 New function Autotagging added to Operator’s Instructions.
October 2012 12.1.SP3 Distance to RSO added to Operator’s Instructions.
October 2012 12.1.SP# New functions added to Operator’s Instructions: Save to SDB
and Subpicture from SBD
October 2012 12.1.SP3 Update to chapter Automatic Drawing Production (ADP).
October 2012 12.1.SP3 Update to Operator’s Instructions / Dimension / 3D / Distance to
RSO.
January 2013 12.1.SP4 New chapter in Appendices; Remove Obsolete .SDB Files.
January 2013 12.1.SP4 New chapter in Operator’s Instruction/Tools/Model View - Split
February 2013 12.1.SP4 New default keyword - DWG_NAME_MAX_LEN
April 2013 12.1.SP4 Two new default keywords -
MODEL_SUBPICTURE_2DREGROUP_ALLOW and
MODEL_COMPONENT_AS_CURRENT_ALLOW
April 2013 12.1.SP4 New functionality in Open Drawing - Read-only mode.
Operator’s Instructions - Open Drawing.
Marine Drafting User Guide

Revision Sheet

Date Version Comments / Remarks


May 2013 12.1.SP4 Improved functionality for editing evaluation of dimension text.
May 2013 12.1.SP4 A number of Drafting keywords controlling the blanking concept
have been introduced.
May 2013 12.1.SP4 New functionality; Distribute Drawings of a certain type across
several DEPTs.
May 2013 12.1.SP4 New chapter in Operators’s Instructions Drafting / ANNOTATE/
LABEL

Modified Operators’s Instructions Drafting / MODIFY/LABEL

Modified Appendices/Drafting default keywords


Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

Marine Drafting User Guide

Contents Page

Drafting
Operator’s Instructions Drafting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator’s Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator’s Instructions Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
SAVE AND UNCLAIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
SAVE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
GET WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
EXTRACT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
NEW DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
OPEN DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
CLOSE DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
SAVE DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
SAVE DRAWING AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
PRINT PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
PRINT .............................................................. 1:6
DRAWING REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
COLLAPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
EXPAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
DISSOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
SHOW ............................................................................ 1:8
TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

DXF ........................................................................... 1:10


DWG ........................................................................... 1:10
IGES ........................................................................... 1:11
SDB ........................................................................... 1:11
EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:12
DXF ........................................................................... 1:12
CGM, TIF, SVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:12
IGES ........................................................................... 1:13
SDB ........................................................................... 1:13
DATA BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14
LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14
DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:16
MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:23
MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:23
HULL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:23
OUTFITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:23
OUTFITTING DRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:23
DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:24
SPOOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:24
ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:24
PARAGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:24
SPECON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:25
PROPCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:25
EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:25
EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:26
DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:26
GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:26
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:28
DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:29
PART OF DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:30
NOTE ........................................................................... 1:30
LABEL ........................................................................... 1:30
POSITION NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:31
HATCH PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:31
HATCH PATTERN ISLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:31
CLOUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:32
MARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:32
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:32
TEXT ........................................................................... 1:33
DRAWING REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:33
CONSTRUCTION LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:34
BY LAYER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:34
BY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:35
LAST ENTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36
REPAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36
ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:37

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

IN ........................................................................... 1:37
OUT ........................................................................... 1:38
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:38
AUTO ........................................................................... 1:39
PREVIOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:39
DOUBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:39
HALF ........................................................................... 1:39
DEFINE WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:40
SELECT WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:41
PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:41
LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:42
GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:42
VISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:43
SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:43
ENVELOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:45
DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:45
REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:46
2D RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:46
VISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:46
NEW VIEWPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:46
SHADED VIEWPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:47
SHADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:47
SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:47
AUTOSCALE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:47
ZOOM WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:48
ZOOM ........................................................................... 1:48
SLIDE ........................................................................... 1:48
SPIN ........................................................................... 1:49
WALK ........................................................................... 1:49
TILT ........................................................................... 1:49
ZOOM MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:50
TOP VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:50
FRAME VIEW - LOOKING AFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:50
FRAME VIEW - LOOKING FOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:51
SIDE VIEW - LOOKING PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:51
ISOMETRIC VIEW - LOOKING AFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:51
ISOMETRIC VIEW - LOOKING FOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52
PERSPECTIVE CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52
MESSAGE WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52
LOG VIEWER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52
EXPLORERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:53
DESIGN EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:53
MANUFACTURING EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:53
DRAFT EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:53
DRAWING EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:53
ADDINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:54
DRAW LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:54
MY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:54
SEARCH UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:54
SEARCH RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:54

© Copyright 1974 to current year. iii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

REFERENCE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55


ATTRIBUTES UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55
COMMAND WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55
LINK DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55
ADD LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55
LINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:56
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:56
INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:56
MODEL ............................................................. 1:58
VIRTUAL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:60
POINT ............................................................. 1:60
LINE ............................................................. 1:61
ARC ............................................................. 1:61
POLYLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:61
STAIRCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:62
SPLINE ............................................................. 1:62
CONIC ............................................................. 1:63
RECTANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:63
SQUARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:64
PARALLEL CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:64
FILLET ............................................................. 1:65
HATCH PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:66
CONSTRUCTION LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:67
TEXT ............................................................. 1:68
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:70
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:71
SUBPICTURE FROM SBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:72
STANDARD DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:73
PLATE PART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:73
DRAWING FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:74
NODES ............................................................. 1:74
CONTOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:74
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:75
TANGENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:75
CONTOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:75
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:76

FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:76
COLOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:77
LINE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:77
LAYER ............................................................. 1:78
HATCH PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:78
DEFAULTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:79

© Copyright 1974 to current year. iv 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

LOCAL ORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:81


GEOMETRY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:81
2D POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:81
LINE ........................................................................... 1:90
ARC ........................................................................... 1:92
CONIC ........................................................................... 1:95
POLYLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:97

ZAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:98
OPERATION COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:98
QUIT ............................................................. 1:99
CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:99
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:99
ALL ............................................................. 1:99
SUBPICTURE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:99
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:99
SUBVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:100
COMPONENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:100
SUBCOMPONENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:100

TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:101
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:101
PRESENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:101
CROSS SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:102
PANEL INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:102
EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:103
COPY .......................................................................... 1:104
MODEL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:104
EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:105
AUTOSCALE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:105
AUTSCALE ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:106
2D RESTRICTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:106
CHANGE PROJECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:107
UPDATE DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:108
UPDATE ANNOTATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:108
UPDATE ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:108
SLICE .......................................................................... 1:109
SPLIT .......................................................................... 1:109
CLEAR .......................................................................... 1:110
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:110
VALIDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:112
HULL SYMMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:113
BACKDROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:113
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:114
CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:114
SAVE .......................................................................... 1:116
SAVE AS STD DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:117
SAVE AS STD HATCH PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:118
SAVE TO SDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:119
EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:120

© Copyright 1974 to current year. v 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:121
REDEFINE TRANSFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:122
REGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:124
SPLIT .......................................................................... 1:126
VITESSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:128
RUN SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:128
RUN SELECTED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:128
FILES .......................................................................... 1:128
EDIT .......................................................................... 1:129
DEBUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:129
LOG WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:129
RELOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:129
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:130
STOP SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:130
INQUIRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:131
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:131
NAME .......................................................................... 1:131
VERIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:132
USED LAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:132
WORKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:133
DRAWING STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:133
ATTRIBUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:133
Design Area Docs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:134
PROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:134
USER STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:134
DATA ACCESS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:135
DB CHANGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:135
GLOBAL COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:135
GLOBAL LOCKING AND ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:136
DRAWING FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:136
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:136
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:137
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:138
OPEN .......................................................................... 1:138
SAVE .......................................................................... 1:140
REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:141
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:142
INSPECT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:142
CLEAN WORKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:145
GLOBAL TRANSACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:145
MESSAGE CONFIRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:146
CLAIM LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:146
LISTS ............................................................ 1:147
DB LISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:147
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:147
EXPLORER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:147
RESET WINDOW LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:147
PREFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:148
DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:148

© Copyright 1974 to current year. vi 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

LINEAR ............................................................ 1:150


RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:154
DIAMETER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:158
ANGLE ............................................................ 1:161
CURVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:164
AREA ............................................................ 1:168
DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:168
3D ............................................................ 1:169
LINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:169
AXIS PARALLEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:172
COORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:176
CURVE LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:178
WEIGHT AND COG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:178
SHELL PROFILE MOUNTING ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:180
DISTANCE TO RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:186
DISTANCE TO PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:190

ANNOTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:194
GENERAL NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:194
POSITION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:195
CONFIG NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:196
CONFIG SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:197
CONFIG MOVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:197
HULL NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:198
POS NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:198
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:199
BEVEL .......................................................................... 1:200
GRINDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:200
HOLE DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:201
LABEL ............................................................ 1:202
AUTOTAGGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:207
MARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:208
RULER ............................................................ 1:209
POSITION RULER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:210
COORDINATE AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:212
PIPE RESTRICTION SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:212
GENERAL RESTRICION SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:213
CROSS ............................................................ 1:213
CLOUD ............................................................ 1:214
MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:215
MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:215
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:215
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:215
REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:216
COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:217

© Copyright 1974 to current year. vii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

TEXT .......................................................................... 1:217


SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:218
GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:218
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:219
TRANSFORM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:220
GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:220
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:221
SCALE .......................................................................... 1:221
MOVE DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:222
MOVE TWO POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:222
ROTATE DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:222
ROTATE TWO POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:223
ROTATE 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:223
ROTATE 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:223
ROTATE 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:223
ROTATE -90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:223
MIRROR U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:224
MIRROR V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:224
MIRROR LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:224
PARALLEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:224
TRANSFORM FOUR POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:225
SAME AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:225
ALONG CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:225
LOCK U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:225
LOCK V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:226
CENTRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:226
FORM DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:226
TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:227
TO ENTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:227
BY LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:228
GAP .......................................................................... 1:229
CUTOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:230
FILLET .......................................................................... 1:231
STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:232
CHAIN ............................................................ 1:235
DECHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:237
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:238
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:238
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:238
DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:240
LABEL ............................................................ 1:243
LABEL PLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:246
CLOUD ............................................................ 1:248
COLOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:248
LINE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:249
FILL STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:250
LAYER ............................................................ 1:253
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:254

© Copyright 1974 to current year. viii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

PROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:254
CHANGE VIEW MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:254

AUTODP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:255
ASSEMBLY DELIVERABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:255
HVAC SKETCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:255
PIPE SKETCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:255

WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:256
ARRANGE ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:256
CASCADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:256
CLOSE ALL WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:256
TILE VERTICALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:257
MINIMIZE ALL WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:257
MAIN VIEWPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:257

HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:257
CONTENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:257
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:258
ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:258

Marine Drafting User Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Automatic Drawing Production (ADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Known Limitations using ADP in Marine Drafting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
General ADP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Command Accelerators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Workflow Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Persisted Data Base Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Save Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Drawing Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3

Model Viewing and General Drafting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1


Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Storing and Organization of Drawings in PADD Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Storing and Organization of Individual Drawing Files (.SDB files). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
User-Defined Drawing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Maximum Number of Drawings in a REGI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Link Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Drawing Hierarchy (Subpictures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Drawing Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ix 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

Drawing References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6


Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
System Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
User Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Layer Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Model Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Annotation and Drafting Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Standard Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Drawing Forms and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Geometric Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Lines, Arcs, Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Notes and Position Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Config Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Config Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Config Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
The Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
The Hook Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
getNoteName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11
getNoteChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11
getNoteFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
getNoteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14
setNoteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:16
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:16
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Truetype Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Basic Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Complex Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:19
User Defined Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:19
Line Type Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20
Parameters controlling the Display of Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20
The Line Type Name alias File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:22
Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23
Common Functions and Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23
Basic 2D Geometry Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23
Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23
Popup menu in 2D and 3D point mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24
Line Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24
Arc Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24
Segment Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:25
2D Offset Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:25
3D Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:25
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26

© Copyright 1974 to current year. x 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

3D Request Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26


The Usage of 2D Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26
Basic 3D Point Definition Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27
Popup menu in 2D and 3D point mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27
Locking Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27
Add (3D) Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:28
Set Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:29
Verify ........................................................................... 2:29
Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:29
Capture ............................................................. 2:29
Multiple Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30
Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30
Automatic Positioning of a Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30
Automatic Positioning of a Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30
Perform Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31
The Transform Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31
Basic Transformations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31
Combined Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Select Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Model attributes obtained by Tools-Inquiry-Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Selection of Model Name and Name Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Creating Drawing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
Creating a New Drawing Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
Changing an Old Drawing Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
Creating Note and Position Number Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
Note Symbol Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34
Position Number Symbol Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
Creating Hatch Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
Geometry Linetype Change When Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36
MouseWheelZoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36
Zoom Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:37
Common Layout Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:37
2D Linear Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:38
3D Linear Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:40
3D Axis Parallel Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:40
Distance to Plane Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:40
Angle Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:40
Radius Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:41
Diameter Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:42
Coordinates Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:43
Layout of Curve Length Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:44
Layout of Area Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:44

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xi 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

Adding Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:44


Hull Mould Line Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:45
Import/export using 2D DXF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:46
Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48
Layer Control in DXF Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48
Mapping Line Types in DXF Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:49
Import / Export using IGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:53
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:53
IGES Entities Handled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:53
Export of 3D DXF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:54
Drag and Drop to the 2D Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55
Standard Left Mouse Button Drag Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55
Right Mouse Button Drag Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:56
Other Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:56

Usage Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:57


The Benefits of Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:57
Example of Layers and Subpictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:57
Subpictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:58
Levels of Subpictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:58
Subpictures Created by the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:58
Subpictures Created by the User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:59
Recommended Subpicture Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:59
Replacing Dialogue String Input with Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:60
Context Sensitive Right Click Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61
Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62
Navigate To - functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62
Multiple Select in Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:67
How to Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:67
Multiple Select Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:67
How to Cancel Multiple Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69
Work with Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70
Trim Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70
Extend Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72
Other Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:74
Change Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:74
Change Highlighting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:74

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
SB021 - Symbol Font Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
SY006 - Insert Text by Drawing Form Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
SY007 - Validate Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

SY013 - Store Drawings in the PADD Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4


SB028 - Handle Standard Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
SB029 - Create Drawings Presenting Symbols in Specified Fonts . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
TBGENPREVIEW - Generate Drawing Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
SZ024 - Export to Neutral Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Purpose of the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Components of the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Input Data to the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Resulting Data from the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Operator Action for Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Alternative way of invoking the conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Format for Information Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12
Keywords and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12
Overall Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15
General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Curve ........................................................................... 3:16
Primitive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Example of Object File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17
Restrictions for SZ004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19
Restrictions of SZ004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19
Format for Information Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Keywords and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Overall Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:23
General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:23
Primitive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:24
Contour Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:27
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28
Cap ........................................................................... 3:28
Parallel Epiped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28
Cone ........................................................................... 3:29
Torus ........................................................................... 3:29
Rotational Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30
General Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30
Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30

SZ004 - Creation of Pictures by Extracting Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31


General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
Interpreter for Creation of Model Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
How to Run the Program for Creation of Model Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:32
Interpreter for Creation of Model Pictures in Batch - Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
Conventions Used in this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
Statement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
Scheme Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
Statement Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xiii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

Creation of a Model Picture in Batch - Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:38


SY010 - Drawing Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1
Internal Drawing Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Set-up Files used by Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Compatibility with other Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Drafting Default File Keywords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Print Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Projection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:5
Hatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:11
Notes, Position Numbers and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:12
Drawing Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:14
Unit Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:15
Default Colours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:15
Default Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:16
Horizontal/Vertical Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Verify & Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Auto Point Definition Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:18
Coordinate Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:19
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:19
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:20
Plate Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:20
Unit System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:20
Coordinate Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:21
MarkUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:21
Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:22
PADD Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:33
Example of a Default File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:35
Colour Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:35
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:35
Example of a Layer Alias File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:43
Example of a Layer Class File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:44

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xiv 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

Example of a Material Alias File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:44


Example of an Intelligent Texts file for Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:44
System Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:45
General Drafting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:45
Projection Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:46
Hull Modelling Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:48
Outfitting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:48
General 3D Picture Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:48
Symbol Fonts Reserved by the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:48
System-defined Text Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:52
Example of a DXF Layer Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:52
Backup and Restore Facilities for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:54
Remove Obsolete .SDB Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:56
Drawing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:57

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xv 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Contents

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xvi 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Operator’s Instructions Drafting

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Operator’s Instructions Drafting

FILE

SAVE AND UNCLAIM

Purpose: Save the element changed or created in the session to disk, so


that other users can pick up the changes. All elements are also
unclaimed, so that other users may change them

Instructions: In the File menu, click Save and Unclaim.

Options: None.

Result: The elements are saved to disk, and are o pen for updates.

SAVE WORK

Purpose: Save changed or created elements in the session to disk. The


elements remain claimed to the current session.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Save Work.

Options: None.

Result: Changed or created elements are saved to disk.

GET WORK

Purpose: Pick up the changes that other people have made to the
database since your sessions was started.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Get Work.

Options: None.

Result: Elements created or changed by other users are made visible in


the current session.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EXTRACT CONTROL

Purpose: Handle database extracts.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Extract Control. This will open the dialog
that handles extract issues, such as issuing and flushing.

Options: None.

Result: Depending on user actions.

NEW DRAWING

Purpose: To create a new drawing.

Instructions: In the File menu, click New Drawing.


If a drawing already is current, you will be prompted to save this
drawing before the new one is created.
In the new drawing dialog you can select the name of the type of
the new drawing. By default the system will suggest an
"UNTITLED" name, UNTITLED1 for instance (if a drawing with
this name already exists it will suggest UNTITLED2 instead. If
UNTITLED2 already exists it will suggest UNTITLED3 etc). If you
don't do any changes in this field the name is regarded as
‘system defined’ otherwise it is ‘user defined’. This condition will
affect the behaviour of the Save Drawing function, please see
below.
In the Backing Sheet field you can (optionally) define the name of
a backing sheet to be added to the new drawing. You can key in
the name or click the Browse button which will allow You to
search/browse for a proper backing sheet.

Options: If the variable DWG_NAME_UPPERCASE is set to Yes it is not


possible to use lowercase characters in the Drawing Name field.
With the variable DWG_NAME_MAX_LEN you can control the
maximum number of characters that can be given for the new
drawing name.

Result: A new drawing with the selected name and type is created and
made current.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

OPEN DRAWING

Purpose: To open an existing drawing, either within a standard drawing


data bank or within a customer defined drawing data bank.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Open Drawing.


If a drawing already is current, You will be prompted to save this
drawing before the new one is opened.
In a dialog that now appears, the name of the drawing can be
either keyed in or selected from a list of drawings. The drawing
list is generated by typing a wild card name (containing '*' and/or
'%') and thereafter selecting the List button. Once the name of
the drawing has been keyed in, or selected from the list, click the
Open button to open the drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: You can filter your selection on drawing types in the Type field.
Only drawings matching the selected type will be listed.
However, if the type is "General Drawing", drawings with
"undefined" drawing type will also be included in the result list.
Drawings generated in Outfitting Draft have undefined drawing
type.
There is an option to open the drawing in read-only mode by
checking the Read-only check box. With this functionality you
will not claim the drawing for other users. In the read-only mode
you will actually be working in a temporary copy of the selected
drawing. You should not do any permanent changes to this
drawing. The drawing cannot be saved, neither with "Save
Drawing" nor with "Save Drawing As". You can only do "export
SDB". This copy is disconnected from the PADD database and
for that reason it is not possible to do changes that requires a
PADD database, for example:
• Draw outfitting
• Create or modify associative dimensions
• Create or modify associative labels
The user can, before opening the drawing, control the initial
appearance of the drawing with respect to Envelopes (however,
envelopes already defined in the drawing are not affected).
Select the desired alternative in the Envelope radio box:
• None - No envelope control (default)
• Initial - All views are initially shown with its envelope
• Permanent - All views are permanently defined as
envelopes
The user can also, before opening the drawing, control the
automatic expanding of Drawing References. The Expand
Drawing References check box is used for this purpose.
If you click the Open via Link button, this will open a dialog that
will let you select a drawing reference in the link documents
hierarchy.
If the variable DWG_NAME_UPPERCASE is set to Yes it is not
possible to use lowercase characters in the Drawing Name field.

Result: An existing drawing is opened and displayed on the screen.

CLOSE DRAWING

Purpose: To close the current drawing without exiting the application.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Close Drawing.


You will be prompted to save the drawing before closing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing will be closed.

SAVE DRAWING

Purpose: To save the current drawing in the Drawing data bank.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Save Drawing.


If the name of the current drawing is system defined you will
enter the "Save As" dialog where you can give a new user-
defined name of the drawing.

Options: If the variable SBB_SAVE_PREVIEW is set to "YES", a preview


of the drawing will be saved.

Result: The current drawing will be saved on the Drawing data bank.

SAVE DRAWING AS

Purpose: To save the current drawing with a new unique name in the
Drawing data bank.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Save Drawing AS.


In the object browser dialog that now appears, You can select a
new name. Note that no drawing with this name must already
exist in the data bank. It is possible to browse the contents of the
Drawing data bank by keying in a wild card name.

Options: The User can save the drawing as a new drawing type in the
Type field prior to clicking the Save button.
The Save as link button will allow You to add a reference to the
current drawing in the link documents hierarchy.
If the variable SBB_SAVE_PREVIEW is set to "YES", a preview
of the drawing will be saved.

Result: The current drawing is renamed and saved with the selected
drawing type. All changes to the original drawing will be
discarded.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

PRINT PREVIEW

Purpose: To show You how the drawing will look like when printed.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Print Preview.


A dialog showing the drawing when printed will appear. After
inspecting the print result, You may start printing or just close the
dialog.

Options: None.

Result: The look of the drawing when printed will be shown.

PRINT

Purpose: To print the current drawing.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Print.

Options: Printer properties and print options can be selected in the dialog
before print job is started. Effective Print Area and Scale and
Orientation options can be saved through button Save Settings
and used later in another session of Drafting based application.

Result: The current drawing will be printed on the current print device.

DRAWING REFERENCE

Purpose: To administer the handling of Drawing References in the current


drawing.

DEFINE

Purpose: In the current drawing, to establish references to other drawings


in the Drawing data bank.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Define.


In the object browser dialog that now appears, You are prompted
to key in the name of the reference drawing. It is possible to
browse the contents of the Drawing data bank by keying in a wild
card name.
Once selected, the content of the referred drawing is positioned
by user in the current drawing, using the general transformation
tool. The link to the reference drawing is now established.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: A link to a reference drawing is established, with the geometric


information shown.

COLLAPSE

Purpose: In the current drawing, to remove geometric information in


drawing references.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Collapse.


The (expanded) drawing references to collapse are now
indicated by user, one by one. Select All to collapse all
references in the drawing. Once selected, the geometric
information will be replaced by the drawing reference symbol (a
circle containing a identification number and circumscribed by a
rectangle). Note that the link to the referred drawing will remain.

Options: None.

Result: The geometric information in drawing references will be


removed, but with the link maintained.

EXPAND

Purpose: In the current drawing, to return geometric information in drawing


references.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Expand.


The (collapsed) drawing references to expand are now indicated
by user, one by one. Select All to expand all references in the
drawing. Once selected, the drawing reference symbol will be
replaced by the geometric information in the referred drawing.

Options: None.

Result: The geometric information in drawing references will be returned.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EXCHANGE

Purpose: In the current drawing, to exchange (refresh) the geometric


information in drawing references. Note that this operation is
equal to collapse followed by expand.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Exchange.


The (expanded) drawing references to exchange are now
indicated by user. Select All to exchange all references in the
drawing. Once selected, the contents of the drawing reference
will be exchanged with the geometric information in the referred
drawing

Options: None.

Result: The geometric information in drawing references will be updated.

DISSOLVE

Purpose: In the current drawing, to permanently remove th link to referred


drawings.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Dissolve.


The drawing references to dissolve are now indicated by user.
Select All to dissolve all references in the drawing. Once
selected, the connection to the referred drawing will be broken.
The current drawing is now the sole owner of the geometric
information, formerly owned by the referred drawing.

Options: None.

Result: The connections to reference drawings are removed.

SHOW

Purpose: To verify all expanded drawing references in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Show.

Options: None.

Result: All expanded drawing references will be verified by their drawing


reference symbol (as if they were collapsed).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

TRANSFER

Purpose: To copy selected information in the current drawing to another


drawing in the Drawing data bank or any other data bank. If the
receiving drawing does not exist, it will be automatically created.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Transfer.


In the object browser dialog that now appears, You are prompted
to key in the name of the receiving drawing. It is possible to
browse the contents of the Drawing data bank by keying in a wild
card name.
If the receiving drawing does not exist in the data bank, it will be
created automatically. In this case a browser for the Standard
data bank appears and You will be prompted to key in the name
of the desired form. Also here, it is possible to browse the
contents of the Standard data bank by keying in a wild card
name. To skip the form, just click OK.
Next, You are asked how to select the information to transfer:
1. by subpicture
2. by layer
When selecting by subpicture, the subpictures are indicated by
user, one by one. In case the receiving drawing contains a form,
You are prompted to give the position for each subpicture in the
receiving drawing, relative to that form. When ready with the
subpicture selection, click Operation Complete or Cancel.
When selecting by layer, layer numbers are keyed in by user,
one by one. When ready with the layer selection, just click CR or
click Cancel.
To complete the transfer operation, click Operation Complete.

Options: By clicking Options, it is possible specify the data bank for the
receiving drawing. Just key in the name of an existing data bank.

Result: Information selected by user in the current drawing is copied to


the receiving drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

IMPORT

DXF

Purpose: To import drawings in DXF file format and make this the current
drawing.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Import, then DXF.


If a drawing already is current, You will be prompted to save this
drawing before the new one is imported.
In the form that appears enter the full part to the dxf file to import
or use the brows button. When the file has been selected click
the Load button. This will update the Layers, Line types and
Fonts tabs with mapping information. If needed the mapping
information can be edited in the form. Optionally, set the drawing
type to the required type. Finally click the Import button to
perform the import. The drawing created will be opened with the
name UNTITLED.

Options: None.

Result: A drawing in DXF file format will, after conversion to drawing


format, be opened.

DWG

Purpose: To import drawings in DWG file format and make this the current
drawing.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Import, then DWG.


If a drawing already is current, You will be prompted to save this
drawing before the new one is imported.
In the form that appears enter the full part to the dwg file to
import or use the brows button. When the file has been selected
click the Load button. This will update the Layers, Line types and
Fonts tabs with mapping information. If needed the mapping
information can be edited in the form. Finally click the Import
button to perform the import. The drawing created will be opened
with the name UNTITLED.

Options: None.

Result: A drawing in DWG file format will, after conversion to drawing


format, be opened.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

IGES

Purpose: To import drawings in IGES file format and make this the current
drawing.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Import, then IGES.


If a drawing already is current, You will be prompted to save this
drawing before the new one is imported.
In the file browser that now appears, the user is prompted to key
in the name of the IGES file to import. When given, the system-
proposed name of the resulting drawing is presented in a dialog
to be optionally edited and confirmed by the user. Note that the
resulting name must not already exist in the Drawing data bank.
After converting the IGES file, the resulting drawing is created
and made the current one.

Options: None.

Result: A drawing in IGES file format will, after conversion to drawing


format, be opened.

SDB

Purpose: To import a drawing from a file in SDB format. A new current


drawing will be created and stored in the PADD database. (This
function performs the same task as the migration utility sy013.)

Instructions: In the File menu, click Import, then SDB.


In the dialogue that follows you can browse to the desired SDB
file. In the next step a name can be given to the new drawing. By
default the name suggested is the name of the selected drawing.
It is important to notice than that an export followed by an import
may cause loss of data in the PADD database. If you first export
a drawing, delete the drawing in PADD and then import it again
the resulting PADD data may not be the same as for the original
drawing. The reason for this is that some data of a drawing only
exist in PADD and not in the drawing object stored in the SDB
file. PADD data can be lost for:
• Dimensions
• Texts containing ‘intelligent text expressions’
• Labels

Options: None.

Result: A new current drawing will be created. Drawing data is created in


the PADD database.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EXPORT

DXF

Purpose: To save the current drawing in DXF file format.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Export, then DXF.


In the form that appears select the type of export, 2D, 3D or
2D+3D. The 2D export will only export the drawing while 3D
export converts the selected models to DXF 3D Facet format.
2D+k3D will do both. Then select the file type, Text or Binary.
When the 3D export is selected it is possible to make a selection
of model objects available in the drawing to export also the detail
level to use. Note that the size of the DXF file grows with
increased detail level.
It is possible to select if hidden elements an/or layer should be
exported or not. This feature is only relevant for 2D export. The
version of DXF file output can be any of the versions from R12 to
AutoCAD 2004. If 2D+3D export is selected it is possible to set
the printable area by clicking the Printable area... button and
then selecting printer and available paper formats and orientation
in the printer form.
Finally select the output directory and name of the exported DXF
file and click the OK button to perform the export.

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing will be saved in DXF file format.

CGM, TIF, SVG

Purpose: To save the current drawing in SVG, HPGL, TIF or CGM

Instructions: In the File menu, click Export, then CGM, TIF, SVG.
In the form that appears select the type of output format.
It is possible to specify size of TIF image (in pixels). The size can
depend on drawing aspect ratio. Select this option and specify
length of longer drawing edge.
Finally select the output directory and name of the exported file
and click the OK button to perform the export. Browse button can
be used for this purpose.

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing will be saved in selected file format.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

IGES

Purpose: To save the current drawing in IGES file format.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Export, the IGES.


A dialog now appears, in which You are prompted to key in the
name of the resulting IGES file.

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing will be saved in IGES file format.

SDB

Purpose: To save the current drawing in SDB format. The main purpose of
the function it to export drawings stored in PADD to ‘non-
persisted’ drawings stored outside the PADD database. The
exported drawing object will be cleared from references to the
PADD database.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Export, then SDB.


In the dialogue that appears you can select the name and the
directory where to place the exported file.
By default the name suggested is the name of the current
drawing
The default directory is the one assigned to the environment
variable SB_PDB.
The selected name must by valid for a non-persisted drawing:
1. Must be less than 26 characters
2. May contain capital letters A-Z, numbers 0-9, '-' and '_'. If
using lower case they will automatically be converted to
capital letters.

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing will be saved in SDB file format in the
selected directory.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

DATA BANK

LIST

Purpose: To list objects in arbitrary data banks.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Data bank, then List.


Selecting what kind of objects to list
The specific kind of objects to list is selected from a multiple
choice dialog, showing the different alternatives (initial system-
proposed data banks to the right):

1. Drawings
Drawing DB SB_PDB)

2. Standards
Standard Library DB (SBD_STD)

3. Subpictures
Subpicture DB (SBD_PICT)

4. In Book
Standard Library DB (SBD_STD)

5. Other
user-defined DB
The first 4 choices denotes specific kinds of objects while the
last choice Other means that any kind of object can be listed. In
this case, the initial data bank is first supplied by user.

Listing Objects
The name of the object(s) to list is keyed in. Wild cards are
accepted. The names of the matching objects will be listed
together with the following attributes:
• Revision date
• Object codes
• Size, in 512 byte blocks
To list a data bank, other than the initially system-proposed, click
Options. The system will then let You key in the name of another
data bank (the name of the current data bank is proposed).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Listing the Book


If In Book is selected, another multiple choice dialog appears
from where the kind of book to list in is selected:
1. Standard Detail Book
2. Hatch Pattern Book
Next, all existing pages in the book are presented in a dialog,
from where the page to list is selected by user. Once selected, all
existing details within that page are listed. To confirm the listing,
click Close.

Options: None.

Result: Objects will be listed according to User’s action.

DELETE

Purpose: To delete objects in arbitrary data banks.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Data bank, then Delete In.

Selecting what kind of objects to delete


The specific type of objects to delete is selected from a multiple
choice dialog, showing the different alternatives (initial system-
proposed data banks to the right):

1. Drawings
Drawing DB (SB_PDB)

2. Standards
Standard Library DB (SBD_STD)

3. Subpictures
Subpicture DB (SBD_PICT)

4. In Book
Standard Library DB (SBD_STD)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Deleting Objects
In the object browser dialog that now appears, You are prompted
to key in the name of the object to delete. It is possible to browse
the contents of the data bank by keying in a wild card name. To
delete in a data bank, other than the initially system-proposed,
click Options. The system will then let You key in the name of
another data bank (the name of the current data bank is
proposed).
Before the actual deletion of an object takes place, it must be
confirmed by You.

Deleting in the Standard Book


If In Book is selected, another multiple choice dialog appears
from where the kind of book to delete in is selected:
1. Standard Detail Book
2. Hatch Pattern Book

Next, the user decides what to delete:


• Whole pages
• Single details within pages
If deleting whole pages, all existing pages in the book are
presented in a dialog, from where the page to delete is selected
bIf deleting single details, the page is selected as above. All
existing details within the selected page are then presented and
the user is asked to select the detail to delete.
Before the actual deletion of a page/detail takes place, it must be
confirmed by You.

Options: None.

Result: Objects will be deleted according to User’s action.

PROPERTIES

Purpose: To add, change and remove some predefined information in the


current drawing such as the drawing name, date, author, scale,
security class etc. The information is saved as part of the
drawing form, connected to specific text rules. For details about
creating a form with text rules, refer to the function Tools /
Drawing Form / SAVE.

Prerequisites: The current drawing must contain a drawing form, with the
underlying form object available in the Standard Data bank.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Instructions: In the File menu, click Properties.


The function uses a SBFS form dialog when interacting with the
user. This form contains a number of fields corresponding to
certain information connected to the drawing e.g. drawing name,
date, author, scale etc. Each field in the SBFS form has a
specific rule number connected to it. The information in such a
field will be inserted in the drawing, according the corresponding
rule number in the drawing form (if it exists). When this function
is entered, it tries to read the information (if there is any) in the
current drawing and when the SBFS form appears this info will
be shown in the appropriate fields. If no information is found for a
certain field, this fields will be empty.
For general information on rules and dynamic texts, see Drawing
Forms and Rules in Chapter Model Viewing and General
Drafting.
The function can handle three slightly different SBFS forms as
described below. The SBFS form to use is controlled by the
Default Keyword UPDATE_DRAW_INFO_FORM.

Fields in the SBFS form #1


The different fields and their corresponding rule numbers:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

The last eight rule numbers @600 - @607 deserves some


explanation. As given by the @ sign, these are rule numbers of
type table. There can be a total of twenty rows for each such rule.
It is possible in the SBF form to scroll between these 20 rows but
not individually; all eight fields will be scrolled together. In the
drawing form, it is recommended to position these rule definition
texts to each other and also to give them the same maximum
number of rows when specifying these rules.
Also the last of these rules deserves an explanation. There are
three "internal" lines for each of the 20 table rows connected to
@607. The distance between the internal lines is predefined to
0,5*<height of text>. One must have this in mind when specifying
the height and interline space for this rule number.

New form rules in Drafting for TDM Information.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Fields in the SBFS form #2.


The different fields and their corresponding rule numbers:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

New form rules in Drafting for TDM Information.

Fields in the SBFS form #3


The layout of this form is nearly identical with the form number 1
depicted above, the difference is the handling of the drawing
name.
If a drawing is named as follows:
<drawing name> = <drawing no>-<sheet no>-<revision>, where
<drawing name> = $2000
<drawing no> = $2113
<sheet no> = $2111
<revision> = $2112
the corresponding fields in the SBFS form are updated
automatically.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Functionality
Here follows a description of the functions buttons in the lower
part of the SBFS form dialog:

The following three functions handles the scrolling of the @


fields.

When the function New rev. is used and the drawing update with
this information, there will be one more row of the @ tables in the
drawing. If there already are 20 rows (maximum no of rows), the
first row of the @ tables will be removed and there will be a new
row at the bottom of each table. This means that the information
in these tables will be scrolled upwards when new information is
entered. As long as there are less than 20 rows in these tables
they will increase downwards.

Options None.

Result: The drawing is updated with the information as defined by the


User.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

MODULES

MONITOR

Purpose: To switch to the Monitor module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Monitor.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

HULL DESIGN

Purpose: To switch to the Hull Design module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Monitor.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

OUTFITTING

Purpose: To switch to the Outfitting module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Outfitting.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

OUTFITTING DRAFT

Purpose: To switch to the Outfitting Draft module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Outfitting Draft.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

DIAGRAMS

Purpose: To switch to the Diagrams module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Diagrams.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

SPOOLER

Purpose: To switch to the Spooler module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Spooler.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

ISODRAFT

Purpose: To switch to the Isodraft module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Isodraft.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

PARAGON

Purpose: To switch to the Paragon module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Paragon.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SPECON

Purpose: To switch to the Specon module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Specon.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

PROPCON

Purpose: To switch to the Propcon module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Modules, then Propcon.

Options: None.

Result: The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.

EXIT

Purpose: To exit the Marine Drafting module.

Instructions: In the File menu, click Exit.


Any current work will, after user confirmation, be saved before
terminating the module.

Options: None.

Result: The Marine Drafting module is terminated after optionally saving


the current work.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EDIT

DELETE

Purpose: To enable the User to permanently delete all types of graphic


items in the current drawing.

Instructions: Several alternative deletion commands are available, each being


for a specific group of graphic entities, including geometry, text,
dimensioning, hatching and drawing layers, etc. The use of each
of the available commands is described in the associated Tip
Text for each.
It is to be noted that deleting a graphic entity does not result in
the automatic deletion of any graphic entities that related to or
referred to the deleted entity.
It is to be noted that the deletion is immediately permanent and
the EDIT > DELETE > LAST ENTITY command does not work in
this context.

Options: None.

Result: Graphic entities, geometry, text and dimensioning, etc. are


permanently deleted from the display and the associated
drawing file.

GEOMETRY

Purpose: To administer the deletion of basic geometric entities like points,


contours, texts and symbols in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Geometry.


You are now prompted to indicate a geometric entity to delete.
Once the entity has been identified, it will be highlighted but not
actually deleted until You confirm it by
• clicking Operation Complete or
• indicating another entity to delete
To cancel the deletion, click Cancel or Quit.
Finally note that geometry belonging to Drawing References
cannot be deleted.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: At entrance (or more exactly as long as no geometric entity is


highlighted for deletion), it is possible to specify what kind of
geometry to delete: just click Options and a multiple choice
dialog will appear, containing the following alternatives:
1. Point
2. Segment
3. Contour
4. Text
5. Symbol
6. Any
The alternative Segment means that, when indicating a multiple-
segment contour, only the segment closest to the indication will
be deleted.
The alternative Any means that any kind of geometric entity
(points, contours, texts or symbols) will be identified for deletion.

Result: User-indicated geometric entities in the current drawing will be


deleted.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SUBPICTURE

Purpose: To administer the deletion of general subpictures in the current


drawing.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Subpicture.


Initially, You are prompted to identify the subpicture to delete by
cursor. However, it is possible to specify how to identify the
subpicture to delete: just click Options and a multiple choice
dialog will appear, containing the following alternatives:
1. By cursor (indicate)
2. By name
3. Envelope
4. By Area
When identifying by cursor, the level of the first indicated
subpicture will be used as default level for subsequently
indicated subpictures. In this way, the user only has to select the
level once when deleting multiple subpictures on the same level.
To change the default level of the subpicture there are three
alternatives:
• Leave and re-enter the function.
• Click Options and re-select by cursor alternative
• To get the currently selected subpicture deleted before
changing the default level, first indicate another subpicture,
then click Cancel twice.
When the subpicture has been identified, the system will then
search for all other subpictures on the same level and with same
name as the indicated one. If a single subpicture has been
identified, it will be highlighted but not actually deleted until You
confirm by
• clicking Operation Complete or
• identifying another subpicture to delete
To deny the deletion, click Cancel or Quit.
If more than one subpicture with the same name are found, all
will be highlighted and the user can then order if all, or just the
one indicated should be deleted. To deny the deletion, click
Cancel.
When identifying by name, the system will find all subpictures
with the given name on any level (it is supposed that a drawing
does not contain identical subpicture names on different levels)
and then proceed to highlight them one by one while letting user
accept (Yes) or deny (No) the proposed deletion. To quit this
dialog, click Cancel. To delete the remaining subpictures without
confirmation, click Options.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

When identifying Envelopes (by cursor), only the indicated


enveloped subpicture will be handled here, regardless the name
of this subpicture.
When identifying by Area, the system will capture all subpictures
on a given level and totally inside a user-defined area (rectangle
or polygon) and then proceed to highlight them one by one while
letting user accept (Yes) or deny (No) the proposed deletion. To
quit this dialog, click Cancel. To delete the remaining subpictures
without confirmation, click Options.
Finally note that subpictures belonging to Drawing References
can be deleted only if they are collapsed

Options: None.

Result: User-identified subpictures in the current drawing will be deleted.

DIMENSION

Purpose: To administer the deletion of dimension components in the


current drawing.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Dimension.


You are now prompted to indicate a dimension to delete. Once
the dimension component has been identified, it will be
highlighted but not actually deleted until You confirm it by
• clicking Operation Complete or
• indicating another dimension to delete
To deny the deletion, click Cancel or Quit.

Options: By clicking All when You are prompted to indicate a dimension to


delete, the system will, after user confirmation, delete all
dimensions in the drawing.
If You want to delete all components within a specific subpicture
(view or subview), click Options during user confirmation and
indicate the subpicture to treat. All components only within the
specified subpicture will then be deleted.

Result: User-indicated dimension components in the current drawing will


be deleted.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

PART OF DIMENSION

Purpose: To administer the deletion of parts of dimension components in


the current drawing.
This function is applicable only on dimensions, consisting of a
number of sub-measures. Such kind of dimensions are:
• linear of type normal or staircase
• curved of type normal or staircase

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Part of Dimension.


You are now prompted to indicate a part of dimension to delete.
Once the part has been identified, it will be highlighted but not
actually deleted until You confirm it by
• clicking Operation Complete or
• indicating another part of dimension to delete
To deny the deletion, click Cancel or Quit.

Options: None.

Result: User-indicated parts of dimension components in the current


drawing will be deleted.

NOTE

Purpose: To administer the deletion of note components in the current


drawing.

Instructions: The user-interaction is similar to Edit / Delete / DIM, see that


section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Note'.

Options: See Edit / Delete / DIM.

Result: See Edit / Delete / DIM.

LABEL

Purpose: To administer the deletion of label components in the current


drawing.

Instructions: The user-interaction is similar to Edit / Delete / DIM, see that


section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Label'.

Options: See Edit / Delete / DIM.

Result: See Edit / Delete / DIM.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

POSITION NUMBER

Purpose: To administer the deletion of position number components in the


current drawing.

Instructions: The user-interaction is similar to Edit / Delete / DIM, see that


section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Position
Number'.

Options: See Edit / Delete / DIM.

Result: See Edit / Delete / DIM.

HATCH PATTERN

Purpose: To administer the deletion of hatch pattern components in the


current drawing.

Instructions: The user-interaction is similar to Edit / Delete / DIM, see that


section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Hatch Pattern'.

Options: See Edit / Delete / DIM.

Result: See Edit / Delete / DIM.

HATCH PATTERN ISLAND

Purpose: This function is used to remove arbitrary regions (islands) of an


existing hatch pattern in the drawing. The boundary of the island
is given by indicating a (closed) contour or a text. It is also
possible to define the boundary as a general closed area within
the hatch pattern.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Hatch Pattern Island.
After indicating the hatch pattern to modify, the user is prompted
to indicate the boundary of the island. Any closed contour, or
contour possible to close by a straight line, will do as a boundary
definition. The boundary may also be defined by the
circumscribed box a user-indicated text.
By clicking Options when the user is prompted to indicate the
island, it is possible to define the boundary by a rectangle,
polygon or a general closed region. The user interaction here is
the same as in the Edit/Delete/By Area function.
Once identified, the hatch pattern inside the boundary will be
removed. When ready, click Operation complete.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: Hatch patterns islands will be removed.

CLOUD

Purpose: To administer the deletion of cloud components in the current


drawing.

Instructions: The user-interaction is similar to Edit / Delete/ DIM, see that


section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Cloud'.

Options: See Edit / Delete/ DIM.

Result: See Edit / Delete/ DIM.

MARKUP

Purpose: To administer the deletion of markup components in the current


drawing.

Instructions: The user-interaction is similar to Edit / Delete/ DIM, see that


section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Markup'.

Options: See Edit / Delete/ DIM.

Result: See Edit / Delete/ DIM.

SYMBOL

Purpose: To administer the deletion of symbols in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Symbol.


The user is now prompted to indicate a symbol to delete. Once
the symbol has been identified, it will be highlighted but not
actually deleted until You confirm it by
• clicking Operation Complete or
• indicating another symbol to delete
To deny the deletion, click Cancel or Quit.
By clicking All when You are prompted to indicate a symbol to
delete, the system will, after user confirmation, delete all symbols
in the drawing. However, if a symbol already is highlighted for
deletion when All is clicked, only symbols of same sort as
highlighted will be deleted.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: User-indicated symbols in the current drawin will be deleted.

TEXT

Purpose: To administer the deletion of texts in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Text Line.


The user is now prompted to indicate a text to delete. Once the
text has been identified, it will be highlighted but not actually
deleted until You confirm it by
• clicking Operation Complete or
• indicating another text to delete
To deny the deletion, click Cancel or Quit.
By clicking All when You are prompted to indicate a text to
delete, the system will, after user confirmation, delete all texts in
the drawing.

Options: None.

Result: User-indicated texts in the current drawing will be deleted.

DRAWING REFERENCE

Purpose: To administer the deletion of Drawing References in the current


drawing.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Drawing Reference.


The user is now prompted to indicate a Drawing Reference to
delete. Once the Drawing Reference has been identified, it will
be highlighted but not actually deleted until You confirm it by
• clicking Operation Complete or
• indicating another Drawing Reference to delete
To deny the deletion, click Cancel or Quit.
By clicking All when You are prompted to indicate a Drawing
Reference to delete, the system will, after user confirmation,
delete all Drawing References in the drawing.

Options: None.

Result: Drawing References in the current drawing will be deleted.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CONSTRUCTION LINES

Purpose: To delete all construction lines in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Construction Lines.


Before the operation is carried out, the user must confirm the
deletion

Options: None.

Result: All construction lines in the current drawing will be deleted.

BY LAYER

Purpose: To enable a User to delete all of the information that is on a


specific layer.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then By Layer.


Enter the Layer number into the dialog box and input 'OK' as and
when correctly entered. In this function the User can enter '0' for
Layer 0 and delete the information on that layer if required.
For layers other than '0', the system will 'high-light' the
information on the specified layer and requests the User to either
input 'Yes' or 'No', according to whether or not the correct layer
has been selected.
For information on Layer 0 the system draws a box around the
geometry/information in order to further 'high-light' that the User
has reached the basic level of the early input.

Options: None.

Result: All of the information on the specified layer is deleted from both
the graphic display and the drawing file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

BY AREA

Purpose: This function is used to and delete all geometric information


inside or outside a restricting area, defined by a rectangle,
polygon or as a general closed area in the current drawing. Note
that contours intersected by the restricting area will be cut up
prior to deletion.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then By Area.


The subpicture to treat is selected by user. Click All to treat the
whole drawing.
The restricting to define will divide the geometric information in
the subpicture (or the whole drawing) in two parts. Before
proceeding, the user must decide what part to keep. A multiple
choice dialog shows up with the two alternatives:
1. Keep inside
2. Keep outside
The way of defining the restricting area is selected by user from a
multiple choice dialog showing up:
1. Rectangle/Polygon
2. General Area
Finally, the restricting area is defined by user. After the restricting
area has been defined and confirmed by user, all geometric
information inside or outside the area is now captured and
deleted.

Note: It is possible to capture also invisible geometry (geometry


that are marked as invisible and geometry that are not
shown because its layer is hidden). This option is
controlled by the Drafting Default keyword
ALLOW_RESTRICT_INVISIBLE_GEOM. This condition
can also be enabled/disabled in this context by clicking
the Options button in the multiple choice dialog
presenting the restrict conditions "Keep inside" and "Keep
outside". Clicking this button will swap the "capture
invisible geometry" condition (from "invisibles ignored" to
"invisibles captured" and vice versa).

Options: None.

Result: Geometric information in the drawing will be deleted according to


user's action.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LAST ENTITY

Purpose: This function is used to 'undo' (remove) the last added geometry
or system component.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Last Entity.

Note: The system does not keep any history of added items,
only the last one created can be removed.

Options: None.

Result: The last created entity will be removed.

TEXT

Purpose: To edit the contents of a text line in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Edit menu, click Text.


The User is prompted to indicate a text to edit. Once indicated, a
text edit dialog appears with the contents of the text initially
presented. After updating the contents in the dialog, click OK to
realize the change.

Options: None.

Result: The contents of indicated texts are changed in the current


drawing.

VIEW

REPAINT

Purpose: Restore the visual quality of the display after deletion operations.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Repaint.


The action of simply selecting the View > Repaint function
restores the visual quality of the display by fully repainting the
graphic entities that remain in the drawing file and currently
displayed on the screen. No other User action is required.
(See also screen icon for 'short-cut' entry.)

Options: None.

Result: The visual quality of the current display is restored to the


previous as-defined state.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

ZOOM

IN

Purpose: To enable a User to visually 'zoom' into a selected region and


thus reduce the apparent scale, resulting in graphic entities
appearing to be larger.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Zoom, then In.


Position the cursor at a suitable position on the screen and click
the left-hand button on the mouse.
Move the cursor to a new position. The system responds by
continuously drawing a rectangular box. This box is positioned
and proportioned according to the selected first point and the
current cursor position becoming the opposite corner along a
diagonal.
When the cursor is in the required position click the left-hand
button again.
The system responds by linearly scaling the box size up to fit the
screen size, with the centre of the box coinciding with the new
centre of the display window and the display contents becoming
increased in size accordingly.
(See also screen icon for 'short-cut' entry.)

Options: There are no options available within this process.

Result: The apparent size of objects, including geometry and text,


displayed on the screen is increased according to the User's
requirements. Additionally the graphic elements may appear in a
different location on the screen.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:37 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

OUT

Purpose: To enable a User to visually 'zoom' away from a selected region


and thus increase the apparent scale, resulting in graphic entities
appearing to be smaller

Instructions: In the View menu, click Zoom, then Out.


Position the cursor at a suitable position on the screen and click
the left-hand button on the mouse.
Move the cursor to a new position. The system responds by
continuously drawing a rectangular box. This box is positioned
and proportioned according to the selected first point and the
current cursor position becoming the opposite corner along a
diagonal.
When the cursor is in the required position click the left-hand
button again.
The system responds by linearly scaling the screen contents
down to fit the box size, with the centre of the original screen
coinciding with the centre of the box and the display contents
becoming decreased in size accordingly. The scale of the
reduction is related to the relative proportions of the sides of
rectangular box to the corresponding screen sides, with the
system choosing the maximum value
(See also screen icon for 'short-cut' entry.)

Options: There are no options available within this process.

Result: The apparent size of objects, including geometry and text,


displayed on the screen is reduced according to the User's
requirements. Additionally the graphic elements may appear in a
different location on the screen

SUBPICTURE

Purpose: To enable a User to zoom the graphics view to a selected sub-


picture.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Zoom, then Subpicture.


Cursor-select any element of the sub-picture. The function then
re-centres the graphics view to be over the selected sub-picture
and automatically re-scales the view of the sub-picture to
maximum-fit the screen.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:38 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: There are no options within this process. The User can use
separate Zoom Up and Zoom Down functions, etc., in order to
bring sub-pictures into the view and to subsequently change the
scale in order to display more clearly the details of the selected
sub-picture.

Result: The centre of the graphic view is positioned over the centre of
the selected sub-picture and the scale changed in order to
provide a maximum view of the sub-picture.

AUTO

Purpose: To display all information in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Zoom, then Auto.

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing is zoomed to display all information.

PREVIOUS

Purpose: To undo the last zoom/pan operation in the current drawing, i.e.
display the previous visible section.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Zoom, then Previous.

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing is zoomed to display the previous visible


section.

DOUBLE

Purpose: To double the zoom factor in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Zoom, then Double.

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing is zoomed in by a factor two.

HALF

Purpose: To decrease by two the zoom factor in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Zoom, then Half.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:39 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing is zoomed in by a factor two.

DEFINE WINDOW

Purpose: To associate the current window (i.e. the visible part of the
drawing), or any user-defined window in the current drawing,
with a window number (0-9) or a description. This number/
description is then used to identify the window in the Select
Window function.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Zoom, then Define Window.


First, all currently defined windows in the drawing will be
highlighted. You are then prompted to give the window number
(0-9) to associate the current window with. The window number
is given by holding the <Ctrl> while clicking one of the 0-9 keys.
The window can also be associated with a string by keying in a
string in the Predefined Window toolbar and clicking the Define
Predefined Window button in the toolbar.

Note: that any previous association with this number/description


will be broken.

Options: The window to associate with a number is by default the current


window. However, it is possible also to explicit define the window.
In this case, click Options when You are prompted for the
window number/description. You may then define the desired
window extension (two opposite corners) before giving the
window number/description. This way of giving the window
extension followed by the window number/description is then
repeated until You click Operation Complete.

Result: Windows in the current drawing will be associated with window


numbers/descriptions according to user's action.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:40 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SELECT WINDOW

Purpose: To display one of the windows, defined in the Define Window


function, in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Zoom, then Select Window.


First, all currently defined windows in the drawing will be
highlighted. You are then prompted to give the window number
(0-9) or description, associated with the window to display. The
window number is given by holding the <Ctrl> while clicking one
of the 0-9 keys. The window description is given by selecting the
description in the Predefined Window toolbar and clicking the
Display Predefined Window button.

Options: Instead of giving the associated window number/description, it is


possible to indicate the window to display. Just indicate one of
the windows when the system asks you to indicate the window.

Result: A predefined window in the current drawing, selected by user,


will be displayed.

PAN

Purpose: To enable a User to 'pan' the screen view over the drawing in
order to position a selected region, showing the associated
graphic entities, in the viewing window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Pan.


The system draws a straight line from the centre of the graphics
screen to the current cursor position, as soon as the cursor is
moved by any amount. The User can then move the cursor in
any direction to a new position and when the left-hand button on
the mouse is clicked the system makes this position to be the
new centre of the graphics window. Any graphic entities on the
screen will appear to move in the opposite direction, and by the
same amount, to the movement of the cursor. The scale of the
drawing and the associated graphics entities are not changed by
this operation.
(See also screen icon for 'short-cut' entry.)

Options: None.

Result: The working graphics window is relocated on the drawing and all
subsequent input and graphic output is through this window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:41 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LAYER

Purpose: To enable a User to hide or show layers from the current


drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Layer.


The Layers dialog has 2 treatment modes: hide mode and show
mode. If in hide mode, all graphical information, on any level
associated with a selected layer, will not be displayed. If in show
mode, only graphical information, on any level associated with a
selected layer, will be displayed.
A list of all different layers in the drawing and all layers currently
selected are presented in the dialog. For each layer, a check box
controls if it is selected.
The combo box Class number, description contains defined
layer classes. The selection of such a class will add its layers to
the layer list. The newly added layers are selected by default.
The user can select (or deselect) all the listed layers using the
Select All check box.

Note: Changing treatment mode resets the list of selected


layers.

The OK button closes the dialog and saves the changes.

Note: The display will be updated automatically

Options: None.

Result: The selected layers, together with the treatment mode, will
control subsequent repaint operations.

GRID

Purpose: To create a particular orthogonal grid pattern to be used in a


specific graphic display.

Instructions: The User can select from one of three available sub-functions,
namely:
• visible
• snap
• define

Result: If the User has 'defined' a grid, then it is stored by the system and
it is automatically presented as part of the current display, and
remains on the display until it has been switched off.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:42 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

VISIBLE

Purpose: To show or hide the grid in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Grid, then Visible.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the grid will be reversed.

SNAP

Purpose: To activate or deactivate the grid snapping in the current


drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Grid, then Snap.

Options: None.

Result: The snap state of the grid will be reversed.

DEFINE

Purpose: To redefine the size and origin of the orthogonal grid in the
current drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Grid, then Define.


In a dialog box showing up, the user is prompted to key in the
grid size, i.e. the distance between two adjacent grid points along
the x- and y-axis (the current size is proposed by the system). A
single value keyed is accepted and will be interpreted as the
distance along both the x- and y-axis.
Next, the user is prompted to key in the x- and y-coordinate of
the grid origin (the current origin is proposed by the system).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:43 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: There are alternatives for defining both the grid size and the grid
origin.
When You are prompted to key in the grid size, click Options
and a multiple choice dialog appears:
1. Standard
2. Key in
3. Two positions
The Standard grid size is controlled by the Default Keyword
GRID_SIZE, while defining by Two positions means that You are
expected to supply two points in the drawing giving the diagonal
of one square of the grid.
When You are prompted to key in the grid origin, click Options
and a multiple choice dialog appears:
1. Standard
2. Key in
3. One position
The Standard grid origin is controlled by the Default Keyword
GRID_ORIGIN, while defining by One position means that You
are expected to supply a point in the drawing giving the origin.

Result: The grid belonging the current drawing is redefined according to


the user.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:44 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

ENVELOPE

DEFINE

Purpose: To define Envelopes in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Envelope, then Define.


The subpictures to define as enveloped can be identified in two
ways:
• One by one, by user indication
• All level-2 subpictures (subviews) inside a user-defined
rectangle
To flip between these alternatives, click Options when about to
define the subpictures. A multiple choice dialog containing the
alternatives for selection will then show up.
Initially, the system assumes You want to define the subpictures
one by one. You are then prompted to indicate subpictures on
level 1 or 2 (views or subviews) to define as enveloped.
When defining subpictures all inside a rectangle, You are
supposed to define a rectangle (two opposite corners) in the
drawing. After confirmation, all level-2 subpictures inside the
rectangle will be defined as enveloped.
The definition of envelopes is repeated until You complete by
clicking Operation Complete.

Options: None.

Result: Subpictures, identified by user, will be defined as enveloped.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:45 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

REMOVE

Purpose: To remove Envelopes in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Envelope, then Remove.


The envelopes to remove can be identified in two ways:
• One by one, by user indication
• All envelopes inside a user-defined rectangle
To flip between these alternatives, click Options when about to
identify the envelopes. A multiple choice dialog containing the
alternatives for selection will then show up.
Initially, the system assumes You want to remove envelopes one
by one. You are then prompted to indicate the envelopes to
remove.
When removing envelopes all inside a rectangle, You are
supposed to define a rectangle (two opposite corners) in the
drawing. After confirmation, all envelopes inside the rectangle
will be removed.
The removing of envelopes is repeated until You complete by
clicking Operation Complete.

Options: None.

Result: Envelopes, identified by user, will be removed.

2D RESTRICTIONS

VISIBLE

Purpose: To show or hide the 2D restriction frames, if any.

Instructions: In the View menu, click 2D Restriction, then Visible.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the view frames will be reversed.

NEW VIEWPORT

Purpose: To pen a new viewport of the current drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click New Viewport.


Indicate a part of the drawing to be shown in the new viewport.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:46 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: A new viewport with the indicated part of the drawing will be
opened.

SHADED VIEWPORT

Purpose: To open a shaded viewport of one of the views in the current


drawing.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Shaded Viewport.


The system will search for a model view in the drawing to shade;
if there are more than one model views in the drawing, the
system asks the user to indicate the view to shade. After the view
has been identified, the system will shade the view and enable it
by entering shading mode.

Options: None.

Result: The current function is applied to the selected model part.

SHADING

SELECT

Purpose: To allow the user to select a model part from the model view in
shading mode within functions that require selection of a model
part.

Instructions: When the system is in Shading mode and the active function that
require selection of a model part, choose the icon Select on the
Shading toolbar and click on the model part you wish.

Options: None.

Result: The current function is applied to the selected model part.

AUTOSCALE

Purpose: To scale all the models to fit the shaded view.

Instructions: Select Auto Scale icon on the Shading toolbar and the scaling
is automatically done.

Options: None.

Result: The whole shaded model view is displayed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:47 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

ZOOM WINDOW

Purpose: To display window defined by two opposite corners from the


current display.

Instructions: Select Zoom Window icon on the Shading toolbar, then click
and hold the left button and move the cursor until the requested
area of the model is covered by the rectangle. Release the
button in order to view the selected area.

Options: None.

Result: A new defined window is displayed.

ZOOM

Purpose: To zoom the requested part of the shaded view.

Instructions: Select Zoom icon on the Shading toolbar, then click and hold
the left mouse button and move the cursor in the requested
direction for either zooming or panning. Release the button when
the desired results are achieved.

Options: None.

Result: The shaded model view is displayed in a new perspective.

SLIDE

Purpose: To slide the current shaded view on the display.

Instructions: Select Slide icon in Shading toolbar, then click and hold the left
button and move the mouse in the requested direction. Release
the button when the desired results are achieved.

Options: None.

Result: The shaded model view is moved in the desired direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:48 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SPIN

Purpose: To spin current shaded view on the display.

Instructions: Select Spin icon on the Shading toolbar, then click and hold the
left button on the current display and move in the requested
direction. The model will rotate in the same direction. The centre
of rotation is the click point. After the button is released the
rotation stops. The User can define again a new centre and
direction in the same manner.

Options: None.

Result: The Shaded model view is rotated around a chosen point in the
requested direction.

WALK

Purpose: To walk through the model in shaded view. This function can be
used only if the Perspective camera is turned on.

Instructions: Select Walk icon on the Shading toolbar, then click and hold the
left button and move the mouse upwards to run forwards and
respectively downwards to move backwards. Point the cursor left
to spot on the left and right to spot on right.

Options: None.

Result: The perspective moves through the model and the User can see
any model part from the desired distance.

TILT

Purpose: To tilt the displayed model.

Instructions: Select Tilt icon on the Shading toolbar, then click and hold the
left button and move the pointer to the left to rotate the displayed
model clockwise or move it to the right to rotate counter
clockwise, around the view centre point.

Options: None.

Result: the model view is rotated around centre point.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:49 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

ZOOM MODEL

Purpose: To zoom a user-indicated model part in the currently

Instructions: In View menu, click Shading, then Zoom Model.


This function is available only if the system is in Shading mode.
The system prompts the user to indicate the model part to zoom.

Options: None.

Result: the indicated model part is zoomed in.

TOP VIEW

Purpose: To present the models in the currently shaded view by looking in


the down direction.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Shading, then Top View.


This function is available only if the system is in Shading mode.

Options: None.

Result: The imodels in the currently shaded view are fitted to the view
and then presented by looking in the down direction.

FRAME VIEW - LOOKING AFT

Purpose: To present the models in the currently shaded view by looking in


the backward direction.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Shading, then Side View - Looking
AFT.
This function is available only if the system is in Shading mode.

Options: None.

Result: The models in the currently shaded view are fitted to the view
and then presented by looking in the backward direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:50 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

FRAME VIEW - LOOKING FOR

Purpose: To present the models in the currently shaded view by looking in


the forward direction.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Shading, then Side View - Looking
FOR.
This function is available only if the system is in Shading mode.

Options: None.

Result: The models in the currently shaded view are fitted to the view
and then presented by looking in the forward direction.

SIDE VIEW - LOOKING PORT

Purpose: To present the models in the currently shaded view by looking in


the port side direction.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Shading, then Frame View - Looking
Port.
This function is available only if the system is in Shading mode.

Options: None.

Result: The models in the currently shaded view are fitted to the view
and then presented by looking in the port side direction.

ISOMETRIC VIEW - LOOKING AFT

Purpose: To present the models in the currently shaded view by an


isometric projection. The main viewing direction is along the
backward direction.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Shading, then Isometric view.


This function is available only if the system is in Shading mode.

Options: None.

Result: The models in the currently shaded view are fitted to the view
and then presented by an isometric projection direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:51 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

ISOMETRIC VIEW - LOOKING FOR

Purpose: To present the models in the currently shaded view by an


isometric projection. The main viewing direction is along the
forward direction.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Shading, then Isometric view -


Looking For.
This function is available only if the system is in Shading mode.

Options: None.

Result: The models in the currently shaded view are fitted to the view
and then presented by an isometric.

PERSPECTIVE CAMERA

Purpose: To switch on/off Perspective camera and enable/disable the


Walk function.

Instructions: Select Perspective camera icon on the Shading toolbar to


switch on/off this mode.

Options: None.

Result: When the Perspective camera is switched on, the model is


automatically displayed in perspective view.

MESSAGE WINDOW

Purpose: To hide or show the Message window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Message Window.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the message window will be reversed.

LOG VIEWER

Purpose: To display the Log Viewer.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Log Viewer.

Options: None.

Result: The Log Viewer dialog appears.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:52 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EXPLORERS

DESIGN EXPLORER

Purpose: To hide or show the Design Explorer window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Design Explorer.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Design Explorer will be reversed.

MANUFACTURING EXPLORER

Purpose: To hide or show the Manufacturing Explorer window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Manufacturing Explorer.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Manufacturing Explorer will be reversed.

DRAFT EXPLORER

Purpose: To hide or show the Draft Explorer window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Draft Explorer.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Draft Explorer will be reversed.

DRAWING EXPLORER

Purpose: To hide or show the Marine Drawing Explorer window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Drawing Explorer.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Marine Drawing Explorer will be


reversed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:53 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

ADDINS

DRAW LIST

Purpose: To hide or show the Draw List window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Draw List.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Draw List window will be reversed.

MY DATA

Purpose: To hide or show the My Data window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click My Data.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the My Data window will be reversed.

SEARCH UTILITY

Purpose: To hide or show the Search Utility window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Search Utility.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Search Utility window will be reversed.

SEARCH RESULTS

Purpose: To hide or show the Search Results window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Search Results.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Search Results window will be reversed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:54 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

REFERENCE LIST

Purpose: To hide or show the Reference List window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Reference List.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Reference List window will be reversed.

ATTRIBUTES UTILITY

Purpose: To hide or show the Attributes Utility window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Attributes Utility.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Attributes Utility window will be reversed.

COMMAND WINDOW

Purpose: To hide or show the Command Window.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Command Window.


It is not recommended to use the Command Window in Marine
Drafting.

Options: None.

Result: The display state of the Command Window will be reversed.

LINK DOCUMENTS

ADD LINK

Purpose: Add a document link to current element.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Add Link.


In the dialog that opens, select or create the appropriate
document link.

Options: None.

Result: A document link descriptor is associated with current element.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:55 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LINKS

Purpose: Bring up the link documents pane.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Links.

Options: None.

Result: Displays the linked documents pane. In this it is possible to view


and open documents associated with model elements.

WINDOWS

Purpose: To allow the user to select any of the redefined windows.

Instructions: In the View menu, click Windows and click the wanted
predefined window.

Options: None.

Result: The predefined window will be shown.

INSERT

Purpose: This mode provides a range of functions and sub-functions, any


of which can be selected at the choice of the User, and that
enable him to systematically evolve a geometric arrangement
comprised of point, line, arc, circle, conic, and spline entities,
etc., together with other simple standard constructs that are
useful in the drawing development process.

Instructions: A range of facilities is available for use and from which a User is
free to select according to the geometric elements that need to
be created and embodied within a drawing.
Select the screen icon that is appropriate to the geometric
element that is to be created. The selected mode of geometric
definition remains the current mode until the User exits from that
form of geometry definition and either selects another geometric
element definition mode, within the Insert menu, or changes to
another facility within the overall module.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:56 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: Any options that are available during the creation of geometric
elements and their insertion within drawings are described in the
Tip Text for each individual function.

Result: The two-dimensional geometric entities, elements, that either


collectively define a physical object, or which are used as
constructions in the definition of the physical object, can be
created and displayed on the screen and subsequently stored
within a drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:57 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

MODEL

Purpose: To view model information in arbitrary model views in the current


drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Model.


The Model Selection dialog is shown up, in which the user can
• Collect the models to be presented.
• Select how to define the target view(s) in the drawing.
The collection of models is an iterative process in which the user
repeatedly adds one or more models by selecting the type and
keying in the name and module of desired models. The names
may be given as a list, separated by commas, and each name
may contain wild cards. Module names may be given as
wildcards. Note that an empty name or module field matches
anything. For some kinds of Hull models, the side may also be
specified. To add the specified models to the collection, click the
All or Verify button. If Verify is selected, the user has the
possibility to exclude models at this stage before adding to the
collection. As a complement to the name specification, it is
possible to restrict the inclusion of models by means of a user-
defined axis-parallel box in space. All models fulfilling the name
specification and also inside or partly inside the box will then be
added to the collection. To order the box restriction, check the
Use Box button.
To define the restriction box, click the Def. Box button, and the
Box Criteria dialog will show up. In this dialog, the limiting
corners of the box may be keyed-in. Another way is to define the
box as the union of a number of model extension boxes. For this
purpose, click the Indicate button and identify the models in the
drawing. The coordinates of the box may be presented in
different ways, such as absolute, relative to user-defined
coordinate tables, GENTAB etc. This presentation is controlled
by the Coord button.
Any box defined by the User may be saved for later access. Just
key in the desired name of the box and click the Save button. To
retrieve a saved box, key in the name of the box and click Load.
The Restrict Views button controls how to treat the presentation
of models collected but partly outside the restriction box. If
checked, parts outside the 2D projection of the restriction box will
be removed in the target view.
Another way to add models to the collection is to indicate models
in the drawing. Click Indicate button in the Model Selection
dialog and collect the models desired.
Clicking the Filter button will invoke a specific Vitesse Drafting
Trigger and is explained in User's Guide / Vitesse / Utilities /
Triggers / Drafting Triggers / Insert Model Filter Pre-Trigger.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:58 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

The number of models collected so far is shown at the bottom of


the Model Selection dialog. To list all collected models so far,
click the List button.
To complete the model collection and start viewing the models,
click the OK button. The definition of the target view(s) now
depends on the current selection in the Projection combo box
as follows:
• New
A new model view will be created. The user gives the
wanted projection and position in the drawing
• All
The models are presented in all existing model views in the
drawing.
• Single
A single model view in the drawing is indicated by the user
• Multiple
Multiple model views in the drawing are indicated by the
user. Click Operation Complete when ready.
• Existing
Same as All, but the models will only be presented in non-
empty model views (i.e. views already containing model in
information).

Options: The Hull View functions Create, Recreate, Detail and Modify
are described in Hull / Planar Modelling / User's Guide /
Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions / Model Generations
and View Functions / View.

Result: Collected models are presented in user-given views in the


drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:59 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

VIRTUAL MODE

Purpose: When the system is waiting for the user to indicate a segment
(line or arc), it is possible to define a virtual segment by clicking
"Virtual Mode" followed by the definition mode of that segment.
Example: The user is about to define a midpoint of a segment
and the system asks the user to indicate a segment. At this
stage, the user can click "Virtual mode" followed by one of the
definition modes in the "Geometry Line" or "Geometry Arc"
toolbars, in order to define a virtual segment from where the
midpoint is derived.
For instance, instead of indicating an existing segment, the user
wants to define a virtual segment defined as a line between two
points. He then clicks "Virtual segment" followed by the "Line:
Two points" button in the "Geometry Line" toolbar. The system
will now let the user define this line and use the midpoint from
that one.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Virtual Mode.


Then click one of the available definition mode buttons in the
"Geometry Line" or "Geometry Arc" toolbar.

Options: None.

Result: Instead of indicating an existing segment, a virtual one is defined


by the user.

POINT

Purpose: To insert a point in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Point.


The 2D point mode toolbar will appear. From this toolbar, select
the appropriate way to define the point. See Point Definition in
Chapter Model Viewing and General Drafting for additional
details.

Options: If the 2D point mode toolbar is displayed, a click on a point


definition mode in this toolbar will implicitly initiate the insertion of
a point, using this mode

Result: User-defined points are inserted in the current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:60 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LINE

Purpose: To insert a line in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Line.


The Geometry toolbar will appear. From this toolbar, select the
appropriate way to define the line. See Line Definition in Chapter
Model Viewing and General Drafting for additional details.

Options: None.

Result: User-defined lines are inserted in the current drawing.

ARC

Purpose: To insert a circle or a circular arc in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Arc.


The Geometry toolbar will appear. From this toolbar, select the
appropriate way to define the arc. See Arc Definition in Chapter
Model Viewing and General Drafting for additional details.

Options: None.

Result: User-defined circles/ circular arcs are inserted in the current


drawing.

POLYLINE

Purpose: To insert an arbitrary contour in the current drawing. The contour


is built up by an arbitrary number of line and arc segments.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Polyline.


The Geometry toolbar will appear, with the last used segment
definition initially proposed. This segment definition can, at any
time while building up the contour, be changed to whatever
desired.

Options: The resulting contour may optionally be chained to an existing


contour in the drawing, see the default keyword AUTO_CHAIN
for further information.

Result: User-defined contours are inserted in the current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:61 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

STAIRCASE

Purpose: To insert a contour built up from orthogonal line segments. All


lines in the contour will be horizontal or vertical.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Staircase.


Start by selecting a point. When you are asked to indicate the
next point you will have a staircase cursor showing what the next
part of the contour will look like. The next part will contain the
horizontal line first followed by a vertical line. Clicking shift while
moving the mouse (and when selecting the point) will flip the next
part, i.e. the vertical line comes first followed by the horizontal
line.

Options: None.

Result: A user-defined staircase contour is inserted in the current


drawing.

SPLINE

Purpose: To enable a User to create a spline through a set of points, with


controlled tangency where required, and to include such in 2-D
drawings

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Spline.


When the routine is first entered, respond to the system multiple
choice question prompt that the purpose is to 'create' a spline.
The system will then request information regarding tangency
conditions, and the User must select from one of the three
options given. The following assumes that the choice of 'none'
has been selected, and the other options are reviewed in the
following section.
Select, with the cursor, the first point, and which will be the
starting point, and then select the other points in the same
sequence in which it is required that the spline is to be fitted.
Signify that all of the points to be splined through have been
identified by clicking the screen button for Input Complete.
The system will create and display a spline together with the
previously defined points, together with a request that the User
respond to the question, is the spline that has been created 'OK'.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:62 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: If the User has selected tangency control over the spline at the
first and last points, or at all points, then the system will request
the User to input the required angle in degrees as each particular
point is identified. The angle is defined where positive denotes
anti-clockwise and measured from the horizontal
Ability to change/modify if required.

Result: A spline will be created, displayed on the screen and stored in


the drawing file. The colour of the spline will be black, unless the
User has changed the colour through the Format > Colour
command, and the line type will be solid.

CONIC

Purpose: To insert an ellipse or a conic segment in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Conic.


The Geometry toolbar will appear. From this toolbar, select the
appropriate way to define the ellipse or conic segment.

Options: None.

Result: User-defined ellipses/conic segments are inserted in the current


drawing.

RECTANGLE

Purpose: To insert a rectangle in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Rectangle.


Two diagonal corners in the rectangle are supplied by the user.
The order of defining the diagonal points are not important.

Options: Fillets may be created at the corners automatically. To activate


this facility, click Options when the system prompts for the first
corner. The fillet radius is then keyed in by the user.

Result: User-defined rectangles are inserted in the current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:63 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SQUARE

Purpose: To insert a square in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Square.


The user-interaction is similar to Insert / REC.
After the two corners have been supplied, the second corner will
be adjusted in order to form a square. For this purpose, the
shortest side will be extended.

Options: Fillets may be created at the corners automatically. To activate


this facility, click Options when the system prompts for the first
corner. The fillet radius is then keyed in by the user.

Result: User-defined squares are inserted in the current drawing.

PARALLEL CURVE

Purpose: To insert a contour, parallel to an existing contour, in the current


drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Parallel Curve.


First, the desired distance is given in the combo box in the
Geometry toolbar. Next, the source contour is indicated by the
user. The sign of the distance and the side of the contour
indicated together determines in what direction the resulting
curve will 'grow'.
Instead of keying in a distance in the combo box, the alternative
Indicate can be selected. In this case, the user is prompted to
define a point in the drawing, through which the resulting curve
should pass.

Options: In the resulting contour, gaps between line segments may be


eliminated in two ways:
• by trimming the line segment to meet
• by inserting a fillet in the gap
Use Options to toggle this behaviour.

Result: User-defined parallel contours are inserted in the current


drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:64 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

FILLET

Purpose: To create fillets, with no trim, between two segments, (lines, arcs,
splines, etc.), in 2-D drawings.
(See also Modify / Trim / Fillet for combined 'fillet and trim'
operations)

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Fillet.


First. the system shows a dialog in which the user can select the
fillet type and key in the dimension.
Then, the user is requested to indicate the two segments
(typically a corner) where to insert the fillet. Click Options or
Operation Complete to go back to the Fillet type selection
dialog.
The User should position the cursor very close to, and within, the
corner between the two segments lines where the fillet is to be
created. Following a single click of the left button the system will
create the required fillet, but without any trimming operations.
If the segments are two lines and stop short of one another and
do not actually intersect, then the system will still try to find the
one quadrant that would be bounded by the two lines if they were
to be extended towards the point of theoretical intersection,
however the process still requires the cursor to be positioned
close to the theoretical intersection point. (Arc fillets are not yet
implemented.)
In case the wanted fillet is hard to define by a single indication, it
is possible to indicate both segments individually. Click Cancel to
flip between indicating fillet and both segments.
The system will fail if there is another entity, particularly an arc,
which would be between the fillet and the corner point.

Options: There are no options, except for the type of fillet, within this
process.

Result: A fillet will be created, The colour and line type of the resulting
fillet will be the same as the segment closest to user indication.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:65 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

HATCH PATTERN

Purpose: To add a hatch pattern to a user-defined region in the drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Hatch Pattern.


The user is prompted to indicate the contours that together
define the region to be hatched within. The sequence of
identification must be continuous such as to create the definition
of effective contiguous contour and the cursor indication should
preferably be within the area to be hatched. These rules provide
the system with guidance in the event that there may be more
than one intersection point between any two successive contours
that bound the region to be hatched.
When all contours defining the region boundary have been
given, click Operation Complete. If the resulting boundary is not
closed, the system will close it by appending a straight line to the
boundary definition.
The system responds by filling in the region with the default
standard hatch pattern.

Options: If the default hatch pattern is set to Key In, then the user is
requested to supply the angle and line spacing of the hatch
pattern.
It is possible to delete islands in the hatch pattern just created.
The system will then enter the Edit/Delete/Hatch Pattern Island
functionality automatically after that the hatch pattern has been
created. Operation Complete completes the island deletion. To
activate/deactivate this feature, click Options while the system
prompts for the boundary definition.

Result: A hatch pattern will be created.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:66 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CONSTRUCTION LINES

Purpose: To toggle the construction geometry mode.


While the construction geometry mode is turned on, all basic
geometry created by the user (lines, arcs, contours etc.) will
defined as construction geometry.
Construction geometry will be assigned the following properties,
regardless of the modal settings:
• Colour: White
• Line Type: Short-Dashed
• Layer: -4
Furthermore, it is possible to create some useful compound
construction geometry inside this function. The construction
geometry mode will in this case not be affected.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Construction Lines.


A multiple choice dialog will pop up, showing four alternatives:
1. Start
2. End
3. Def 0/90
4. Def 45/-45
Click Start to enter construction geometry mode (if not already
turned on), or End to exit construction geometry mode (if
currently turned on).
The choice Def 0/90 will create one horizontal and one vertical
line, while the choice Def 45/-45 will create two perpendicular
lines at 45 and -45 degrees angle from horizontal respectively. In
both cases, the intersection point is supplied by the user.

Options: None.

Result: The construction geometry might be turned on or off. Some


compound construction geometry might be created.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:67 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

TEXT

Purpose: To insert texts in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Text.


First, the text is keyed in, using a simple multi-line editor dialog.
To complete the input, click OK. The effect of typing keyboard
Enter depends on the status of the radio box MultiLine: If
unchecked the input is completed (like clicking OK). If checked a
new line is started.
By clicking Import a browse dialog is shown. The Open button of
the browse dialog allows the User to insert the content of the
browsed file in the multi-line editor dialog. The Cancel button of
the browse dialog closes its own dialog without anything
happening.
By clicking Model Info the User is asked to indicate a model
object and its model information is inserted in the multi-line editor
dialog.
By clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to change some
modal characteristics (height, rotation, aspect, slant, interline
space and font) of the resulting text. It is also possible to define a
lock position in u- or v direction, by indicating another text as lock
reference. See below for more details.
Once the User is ready with the block of text in the dialog, he/she
can place it in the drawing after clicking OK.
By clicking Options before positioning the text, the User can
change the text characteristics and lock position, as described
below. Once positioned, new copies of the text can be positioned
repeatedly until the user interrupts by clicking Operation
Complete.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:68 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: In order to create text of the required font, size, orientation, etc.,
the User can select from a range of options, namely:
Properties:
• Fonts: select font type from table of alternatives, e.g. Arial.
• Font Style: select font style from table of alternatives, e.g.
regular.
• Size: select font size from table of alternatives. The default
value is 3.50.
• Effects: Strikeout and Underline.
• Color.
• Aspect: to stretch out the text. The default value for normal
text is 1.0.
• Slant: key-in slant angle. The default value is 90 degrees.
• Interline space: key-in interline space factor. The default
value is 1.5.
• Layer.
• Copy prop: it copies the properties of an indicated text.
Rotation:
• Standard
• Key in (angle in degrees).
• Same as: indicated existing text.
• Two positions.
Lock U:
The text is constrained to start at a vertical position, regardless of
cursor position when left button is clicked, the vertical boundary
is established by the User, move the cursor to required position,
click Left button.
Lock V:
The text is constrained to be above a horizontal line, regardless
of cursor position when left button is clicked, the horizontal
boundary is established by the User, move the cursor to required
position, click Left button.
Unlock:
Removes any previously ordered locking.
Auto positioning:
• Refer to Automatic Positioning of a Text in Chapter Model
Viewing and General Drafting for details.
If and when a User sets one or more of the options to other than
the standard default value, the selected new option specification
remains as the new default value until the User effects a change.

Result: User-defined texts are inserted in the current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:69 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SYMBOL

Purpose: To enable a User to insert a standard symbol into a drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Symbol.


First, the symbol is selected from a dialog showing all symbols in
the modal symbol font. Inside this dialog, it is possible to select
from any existing symbol font. Just select the wanted font in the
Font combo box.
Once selected, the symbol is dragged into desired position in the
drawing. By clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to
change some modal characteristics (height and rotation) of the
resulting symbol, as well as mirror the symbol in u- or v-direction.
It is also possible to toggle the "auto symbol positioning" status,
see Automatic Positioning of a Symbol in Chapter Model Viewing
and General Drafting for details.
Once positioned, new copies of the symbol can be positioned
repeatedly until the user interrupts by clicking Operation
Complete.

Options: None.

Result: User-defined symbols are inserted in the current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:70 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SUBPICTURE

Purpose: To insert a subpicture, fetched from the Subpicture data bank or


any other data bank, into the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Subpicture.


In the object browser dialog that now appears, You are prompted
to key in the name of the subpicture. It is possible to browse the
contents of the Subpicture data bank by keying in a wild card
name.
If the subpicture selected is a view, no owner has to be defined.
Otherwise, the user is requested to indicate the owner, to which
the subpicture shall belong structurally. Clicking Operation
Complete here means that a new view and possibly a subview
will be created automatically.
The transformation of the owner will now be applied on the
subpicture, before it is positioned and possibly transformed by
the user.

Note: For subpictures to be used in nesting sketches the


highest level should always be level 3. By ensuring that
subpictures do not have a higher level than 3 then it will
be possible to control in which subview of the nesting
picture object the inserted subpicture should be put

Options: To fetch subpictures from a data bank other that the initially
system-proposed, click Options while inside the browser. The
system will then let You key in the name of another data bank
(the name of the current data bank is proposed).

Result: A copy of the user-given subpicture is inserted and transformed


in the current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:71 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SUBPICTURE FROM SBD

Purpose: To insert a sub-picture, retrieved from an SDB file, into the


current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Sub-picture from SDB.


In the file browser dialog that now appears, you are prompted to
select an SDB file. The file must contain a drawing of sub-picture
type otherwise you will see an error message in the message
window.
If the selected sub-picture is a view, no owner has to be defined.
Otherwise, the user is requested to indicate the owner, to which
the sub-picture shall belong structurally. Clicking Operation
Complete here means that a new view and possibly a sub-view
will be created automatically.
The transformation of the owner will now be applied on the sub-
picture, before it is positioned and possibly transformed by the
user.

Note: For sub-pictures to be used in nesting sketches the


highest level should always be level 3. By ensuring that
sub-pictures do not have a higher level than 3 then it will
be possible to control in which sub-view of the nesting
picture object the inserted sub-picture should be put.

Options None

Result: A copy of the user-given sub-picture is inserted and transformed


in the current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:72 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

STANDARD DETAIL

Purpose: To insert a detail, fetched from the Standard Detail Book, into the
current drawing (details reside as subpictures of level 1-3 (view,
subview or component) in the Standard data bank).

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Standard Detail.


All existing pages in the book are now presented in a dialog, from
where the desired page is selected by user. Once the page is
selected, all existing details within this page are presented in
another dialog from where the user is asked to select the wanted
detail.
If the detail selected is a view, no owner has to be defined.
Otherwise, the user is requested to indicate the owner, to which
the detail shall belong structurally. Clicking Operation Complete
here means that a new view and possibly a subview will be
created automatically.
The transformation of the owner will now be applied on the detail,
before it is positioned and possibly transformed by the user.

Options: None.

Result: A copy of the user-given detail is inserted and transformed in the


current drawing.

PLATE PART

Purpose: This function is used to bring in plate parts from the Plate Data
Bank (logical name SB_PLDB) as subpictures, into the current
drawing. The purpose is partly to have a powerful visualisation
function for plate parts but primarily to enable interactive
changes to plate parts in general.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Plate part.


The name of the plate part is defined in a browser dialog, either
from keyboard or from the selection list. Click OK when ready. To
update the browser selection list, type a wild card name and click
OK. Once selected, a level-1 subpicture containing a 'flat' view of
the plate part will now be created and used for insertion in the
drawing. The default drawing scale will be applied on the
subpicture, before it is positioned and possibly transformed by
user.

Options: None.

Result: The chosen plate part is inserted and transformed as required by


the User.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:73 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

DRAWING FORM

Purpose: This function is used to insert a drawing form in the current


drawing. The form definition is fetched from the Standard Library
data bank (logical name SBD_STD).

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Drawing Form.


The name of the form is given in a browser dialog, either from
keyboard or from the selection list. Click OK when ready. To
update the browser selection list, type a wild card name and click
OK. When retrieved, the form layout will be inserted in current
drawing, followed by an auto scale. If a form already exists in the
drawing, it will, after user confirmation, be exchanged. When
exchanging the form, all 'ruled' texts in the existing form that
have a correspondence in the replacing form will be copied.

Options: None.

Result: A new drawing form is inserted in the current drawing. If any


previously used form exists, it will be replaced by the new one.

NODES

CONTOUR

Purpose: To highlight all nodes in a user-indicated contour and optionally


insert them as points in the current drawing

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Nodes, then Contour.


The user is prompted to indicate the contour to verify. Once
indicated, all nodes in the contour are highlighted and the user is
prompted to confirm the insertion.
If confirmed by user, all nodes are finally added as points in the
current drawing.

Options: None.

Result: All nodes in a user-indicated contour are highlighted and


optionally inserted as points in the current drawing. Note that
points inserted at a previous stage will not be duplicated.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:74 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SPLINE

Purpose: To highlight all spline nodes in a user-indicated (spline) contour


(e.g. created by the Insert Spline function) and optionally insert
them as points in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Nodes, then Spline.


The user is prompted to indicate the (spline) contour to verify.
Once indicated, all spline nodes in the contour are highlighted
and the user is prompted to confirm the insertion.
If confirmed by user, all spline nodes are finally added as points
in the current drawing.

Options: None.

Result: All spline nodes in a user-indicated (spline) contour are


highlighted and optionally inserted as points in the current
drawing. Note that points inserted at a previous stage will not be
duplicated.

TANGENTS

CONTOUR

Purpose: To highlight all node tangents in a user-indicated contour and


optionally insert them as lines in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Tangents, then Contour.


The user is prompted to indicate the contour to verify. Once
indicated, all node tangents in the contour are highlighted and
the user is prompted to confirm the insertion.
If confirmed by user, all node tangents are finally added as lines
in the current drawing.

Options: None.

Result: All node tangents in a user-indicated contour are highlighted and


optionally inserted as lines in the current drawing. Note that lines
inserted at a previous stage will not be duplicated.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:75 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SPLINE

Purpose: To highlight all spline node tangents in a user-indicated (spline)


contour (e.g. created by the Insert Spline function) and
optionally insert them as lines in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Tangents, then Spline.


The user is prompted to indicate the (spline) contour to verify.
Once indicated, all spline node tangents in the contour are
highlighted and the user is prompted to confirm the insertion.
If confirmed by user, all spline node tangents are finally added as
lines in the current drawing.

Options: None.

Result: All spline node tangents in a user-indicated (spline) contour are


highlighted and optionally inserted as lines in the current
drawing. Note that lines inserted at a previous stage will not be
duplicated.

FORMAT

Purpose: To establish some aspects of the format of newly created and


displayed entities on the graphic screen and in drawings.

Instructions: The format commands that are available can be selected from at
the discretion of the User. The system assumes various standard
defaults unless the User makes changes through these
commands. Typically a User may wish to use the available
commands at the commencement of a new drawing.
The format commands can be used at any time, however the
actions of format changes are not retroactive to the graphic items
and geometry, etc., that has been created before the format
change was made through use of these commands. The Format
> Layer command establishes the drawing layer on which all
subsequent input is to be stored. The User may need to use the
available alternative 'modify' facilities if changes are
subsequently required to previously existing entities.

Options: Any options that are available during format activities are
described in the Tip Text for that particular command.

Result: The user can set the colour, line type, hatch pattern, various
defaults and drawing layer to be used for all subsequent input.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:76 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

COLOUR

Purpose: To enable the user to set the modal colour for new geometries in
the current drawing

Instructions: In the Format menu, click Colour.


Select the wanted colour from the colour selection dialog,
followed by OK.
To collect the colour from an existing entity, click Options and
indicate the wanted colour in the drawing.
(The user can subsequently change the colour of an established
entity through a Modify function).

Options: None.

Result: All subsequent added geometry will be presented with this line
type.

LINE TYPE

Purpose: To enable the user to set the modal line type for new geometries
in the current drawing. See Line Types in Chapter Model Viewing
and General Drafting for details.

Instructions: In the Format menu, click Line Type.


The modal line type is selected from a dialog showing all
available line types. It is also possible to collect the line type from
existing geometry in the drawing: just click Indicate and indicate
the geometry from where to collect the line type.

Options: None.

Result: All new geometries in the current drawing will be presented with
the model line type.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:77 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LAYER

Purpose: To enable the user to set the modal layer for new geometries in
the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Format menu, click Layer.


The number of the layer or layer class is keyed in. It is also
possible to collect the layer from existing geometry in the
drawing. Just click Options and indicate the geometry from
where to collect the layer.
Unless the User specifies otherwise, by default the system
assumes that all input is to be associated with Layer 0. Thus
unless the User has already invoked this function, all input made
up to the time when the User opens this function and defines a
specific layer, is associated with Layer 0.
See Tools>Inquiry>Used Layers for identification of existing
layers in the drawing.

Options: The User can define the unique layer identification by either a
simple numeric value or as a 'Layer Class'. A 'Layer Class' is
identified by the User typing '#' followed by the unique class
number.

Result: All subsequent added geometry and text will be associated with
this layer.

HATCH PATTERN

Purpose: To enable a user to select either one of the standard hatch


patterns or to create a new one.

Instructions: In the Format menu, click Hatch Pattern.


The system presents the user with a simple dialog box
containing three pre-established standard patterns, one 'key in'
option and one ‘user’ option.
The user selects the required one with the screen cursor. If the
‘user’ option is selected, the desired hatch pattern is then
selected from the Hatch pattern book.

Options: The User can change the predefined standard patterns through
Format > Default.

Result: The hatch pattern to be used when a selected region of a


drawing is being defined as being represented in hatched form,
is established.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:78 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

DEFAULTS

Purpose: This function is provided in order to control various Default


Keywords in the Drafting system. The underlying file is denoted
by the environment variable SBD_DEF1.
These defaults as used in processes that cover a range of
aspects, including:
• texts
• symbols
• projection vectors
• dimensioning
• hatch patterns
• note & position numbers
• draw codes
• colours & line types
• name presentations
• units systems
It should be understood that some of the default keywords can
be updated directly in the contexts in which they are used. Also
note that the underlying default file, holding the current default
settings, can be modified by usage of a standard text editing
program.
Within this function, it is possible to list and update default
settings, to reset the current settings to initial values, and finally
to load or save the current settings.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:79 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Instructions: In the Format menu, click Defaults.


Update default settings
When invoking the function, the Update activity will be entered
automatically.
The current settings will be listed in a dialog showing up. Any
default statement can now be updated by typing the
corresponding default statement in the text field of the dialog. By
single-clicking on desired statement in the list, this will statement
will appear in the text field and can be used as a stub for update.
Click OK when ready.
By clicking Options, it is possible to access the remaining
default handling activities. A multiple choice dialog will then show
up, presenting the following alternatives:
1. Load
2. Save
3. Update
4. Reset
Load a default file
This activity loads the current default settings from a specific file.
The user is prompted for the name of this file.
Save the default settings
This activity saves the current default settings in a specified file.
The user is prompted for the desired name of this file.
Reset the default settings
This activity resets the current default settings to initial values.

Options: None.

Result: The resulting default settings will be the ones accessed, when
required, in the Drafting system.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:80 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LOCAL ORIGIN

Purpose: To redefine the local origin in the current drawing. If the origin is
keyed in, then the given coordinates equal the new origin;
otherwise the given coordinates will be divided by the current
scale giving the new origin, The local origin is initially set to (0, 0)
whenever an old drawing is fetched from the data bank or a new
drawing is created. The local origin in combination with the
current scale is taken in consideration when keying in 2D
coordinates.

Instructions: In the Format menu, click Local Origin.


In a dialog, the user is prompted to key in the new coordinates of
the local origin (the current value is suggested). To change the
2D point definition mode, first give CR, then select the desired
definition mode from the 2D point Mode toolbar. Once a new
local origin has been defined this will be verified, where after the
definition phase is repeated until interrupted by the user.

Options: None.

Result: The local origin is verified and possibly redefined by the user.

GEOMETRY MODE

2D POINTS

Purpose: These functions represent all different ways of defining a 2D


point in the drawing.
See Point Definition in Chapter Model Viewing and General
Drafting for additional information.

Note: The 2D point definitions can also be selected from a pop-


up menu activated by a right mouse button click.

CURSOR POSITION

Purpose: To allow the User to give a free-hand point.

Instructions: Click at desired position in the drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:81 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

NODE POINT

Purpose: To allow the User to define an end point of a segment.

Instructions: Indicate the end of a line or arc segment.

KEY IN

Purpose: To allow the User to key in the coordinates of a point.

Instructions: Key in U, V coordinates from keyboard, then click OK.

EVENT POINT

Purpose: To allow the User to define an event point in a model view.

Instructions: Indicate an event point in a model view.

MID POINT

Purpose: To allow the User to define the mid point of a segment, or a


whole contour.

Instructions: Indicate the middle of a line segment, arc segment, or a whole


contour.

INTERSECTION

Purpose: To allow the User to define an intersection point between two


segment.

Instructions: Indicate the intersection of two line or arc segments. To indicate


the two segments explicitly, click Options.

NEAREST POINT

Purpose: To allow the User to define a point on a segment, closest to the


free-hand position.

Instructions: Indicate nearest position on a line or arc segment.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:82 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EXISTING POINT

Purpose: To allow the User to indicate an existing point.

Instructions: Indicate near an existing point.

ARC CENTRE

Purpose: To allow the User to define the centre of an arc segment.

Instructions: Indicate at the centre of a circle or arc segment.

ARC BY ANGLE

Purpose: To allow the User to define a periphery point on an arc segment.

Instructions: Enter the angle in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Instead of giving an explicit angle, the value 'Indicate" can be
selected from the combo box.
Indicate the arc segment. The point on periphery at given angle
will be selected. If the angle has been defined implicit (as
'Indicate') the point on the arc is defined as the periphery point
closest to the arc indication. Here, periphery points close to one
of the four cardinal directions will snap to the corresponding
quarter points (0, 90, 180 and 270 degrees).

DISTANCE CONTOUR

Purpose: To allow the User to define a point on a contour or a single


segment, at a certain distance from the closest end of this
contour/segment.

Instructions: First, indicate the contour. To treat a single segment, click


Options, then indicate.
Next, key in the absolute distance along this contour/segment.
Click Options to key in the relative distance instead.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:83 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CENTRE OF GRAVITY

Purpose: To allow the User to define the COG of a closed area in the
drawing.

Instructions: Indicate a closed contour. It is possible to define the area as a


combination of an arbitrary number of contours. The definition is
always completed by Operation Complete. If the resulting area
is not closed, the system will close it automatically.

SYMBOL CONN

Purpose: To allow the User to define the coordinates of a symbol


connection.

Instructions: Indicate a connection in a symbol.

OFFSET CURRENT

Purpose: To allow the User to define a point, at an offset from the current
point.

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, key in the desired offset. For
valid offset formats, see 2D Offset Input Format in Chapter
Model Viewing and General Drafting.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:84 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

AUTOMATIC

Purpose: To allow the User to define a "automatic" point, derived from a


free-hand position.
Given a free-hand position, the system derives up to six points in
six different ways as controlled by the six default keywords
AUTO_MODEx, where x = 1,2,3,4,5 or 6. Each of these key
words may contain the code for a certain point definition mode.
Supported definition modes are:
3 - Node Point
5 - Symbol Connection
8 - Arc Centre
10 - Mid Point of segment
13 - Intersection
23 - Event Point
The resulting point will then be the one of the six points that is
closest to the free-hand position. However, if the minimum
distance exceeds the value of the default keyword AUTO_DIST,
the free-hand position is used instead.

Instructions: Indicate a desired position in the drawing.

ADD OFFSET

Purpose: To allow the User to add a 2D offset, after the definition of a


point.

Instructions: After the point has been defined, key in the desired offset. For
valid offset formats, see 2D Offset Input Format in Chapter
Model Viewing and General Drafting.

3D POINTS

Purpose: These functions represent all ways to define a 3D point in the


drawing.
See 3D Point Definition in Chapter Model Viewing and General
Drafting for additional information.
The 3D point definition requests can also be selected from a
pop-up menu activated by a right mouse button click.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:85 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

KEY IN

Purpose: To allow the User to key in the coordinates of a point.

Instructions: Key in X, Y and Z coordinates from keyboard, then click OK.

EVENT

Purpose: To allow the User to indicate an event point in a model view.

Instructions: Click close to an event point in a model view.

OFFSET CURRENT

Purpose: To allow the User to define a point, at an offset from the current
point.

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, key in the desired offset. For
valid offset formats, see Basic 3D Point Definition Modes in
Chapter Model Viewing and General Drafting.

LOCK U

Purpose: To allow the user to lock the line through the current point and
parallel to the v-vector.

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock U to lock the line through the current
point and parallel to the v-vector.

LOCK V

Purpose: To allow the user to lock the line through the current point and
parallel to the u-vector.

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock V to lock the line through the current
point and parallel to the u-vector.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:86 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LOCK VIEW

Purpose: To allow the user to lock a plane through the current point.

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock View.
Select a view to pick the plane (projection) from.

LOCK X

Purpose: To allow the user to lock X to the X coordinate of the current


point.

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock X.

LOCK Y

Purpose: To allow the user to lock Y to the Y coordinate of the current


point.

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock Y.

LOCK Z

Purpose: To allow the user to lock Z to the Z coordinate of the current point

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock Z.

LOCK EVENT PLANE

Purpose: To allow the user to lock a plane through an event point and
perpendicular to the event vector

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock Event Plane.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:87 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LOCK XZ

Purpose: To allow the user to lock a line through the current point and
parallel to the Y-cardinal vector (0,1,0).

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock XZ.

LOCK YZ

Purpose: To allow the user to lock a line through the current point and
parallel to the X-cardinal vector (1,0,0).

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock YZ.

LOCK XY

Purpose: To allow the user to lock a line through the current point and
parallel to the Z-cardinal vector (0,0,1).

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock XY

LOCK EVENT LINE

Purpose: To allow the user to lock a line through an event point and
parallel to the event vector

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock Event Line.

LOCK ANY LINE

Purpose: To allow the user to lock a line through the current point and a
second point.

Instructions: If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry


Mode / 3D Points / Lock Event Line.
Click the desired point to give the second point.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:88 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

UNLOCK

Purpose: To allow the user to cancel a previous lock.

Instructions: Click Format / Geometry Mode / 3D Points / Unlock

SET CURRENT

Purpose: To allow the user to set the current point.

Instructions: Click Format / Geometry Mode / 3D Points / Set Current.


Click the desired point to give the current point

ADD OFFSET

Purpose: To allow the user to add an offset to the defined point. This
should be done prior to the point definition. The offset will be
given after the point definition.

Instructions: Before the point definition, click Format / Geometry Mode / 3D


Points / Add Offset.
Three scenarios exist (depending on the lock status):
1. No lock (a three dimension offset is requested).
2. Plane lock (a two dimension offset is requested).
3. Line lock (a one dimension offset is requested).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:89 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

VERIFY

Purpose: To allow the user to define a 3D point in an iterative way.

Instructions: Click in the desired position to define a point.


Verify the point. Yes means point is defined. No means this point
is set as current point and system proceeds to next step.
Click in the desired position to define a point.
Key in relevant coordinates (XYZ).
Empty string means keep all coordinates of the previous point.
XYZ means keep all coordinates of this point.
YZ means keep Y- and Z-coordinates of this point and keep X-
coordinate of previous point.
X means keep X-coordinate of this point and keep Y- and Z-
coordinates of previous point.

LINE

Purpose: To allow the user to define a line in different ways.

Instructions: Select Insert / Line followed by the wanted line definition mode.

TWO POINTS

Purpose: To allow the user to define a line between two points.

Instructions: Define the first point.


Define the second point.

ANGLE

Purpose: To allow the user to define a line through a point at an angle to


another line.

Instructions: Define the 'through' point.


Enter the angle in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Indicate the line.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:90 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

VERTICAL

Purpose: To allow the user to define a vertical line through a point.

Instructions: Define the ‘through’ point.

HORIZONTAL

Purpose: To allow the user to define a horizontal line through a point.

Instructions: Define the ‘through’ point.

PARALLEL

Purpose: To allow the user to define a line parallel to another line at a


certain distance.

Instructions: Enter the distance in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Instead of giving an explicit distance, the value 'Indicate" can be
selected from the combo box.
Indicate the 'parallel to' line. The resulting line will be defined at
given distance from the indicated line.
If the distance has been defined implicit (as 'Indicate') the
resulting line is dragged into the desired position.

PERPENDICULAR

Purpose: To allow the user to define a line perpendicular to another line


through a point.

Instructions: Indicate the 'perpendicular' line.


Define the 'through' point. The resulting line will be restricted by
this point and the nearest point on the 'perpendicular' line.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:91 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

TANGENT POINT

Purpose: To allow the user to define a line tangent to an arc through a


point.

Instructions: Indicate the arc.


Define the 'through' point. The resulting line will be restricted by
this point and the tangent point on the arc, nearest to the arc
indication.

TANGENT PARALLEL

Purpose: To allow the user to define a line tangent to an arc and parallel to
another line.

Instructions: Indicate the arc.


Indicate the 'parallel to' line. The resulting line will be parallel to
this line and tangent to the arc.

TANGENT PERPENDICULAR

Purpose: To allow the user to define a line tangent to an arc and


perpendicular to another line.

Instructions: Indicate the first arc.


Indicate the second arc. The resulting line will be tangent to both
arcs.

TANGENT TWO ARCS

Purpose: To allow the user to define a line tangent to two arcs.

Instructions: Indicate the first arc.


Indicate the second arc. The resulting line will be tangent to both
arcs.

ARC

Purpose: To allow the user to define an arc in different ways.

Instructions: Select Insert / Arc followed by the wanted arc definition mode.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:92 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

THREE POINTS

Purpose: To allow the user to define an arc through three points.

Instructions: Define the start point of the arc.


Define a periphery point on the arc.
Define the end point of the arc.

CENTRE AND RADIUS

Purpose: To allow the user to define a circle with a centre and a radius.

Instructions: Enter the radius in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Define the centre of the circle.

TWO POINTS AND AMPLITUDE

Purpose: To allow the user to define an arc with two end points and an
amplitude.

Instructions: Define the start point of the arc.


Enter the amplitude in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Instead of giving an explicit amplitude, the value 'Indicate" can be
selected from the combo box.
Define the end point of the arc. The resulting arc will be defined
with given amplitude.
If the amplitude has been defined implicit (as 'Indicate') a third
point is required to give the amplitude.

TWO POINTS AND RADIUS

Purpose: To allow the user to define an arc with two end points and a
radius.

Instructions: Enter the radius in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Define the start point of the arc. Define the end point of the arc.
The resulting arc will be defined with given radius.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:93 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CENTRE AND POINT

Purpose: To allow the user to define a circle with a centre point and a point
on the circle.

Instructions: Define the centre of the circle.


Define a point on the circle edge.

CENTRE AND TANGENT

Purpose: To allow the user to define a circle with a centre point and a
tangent to the circle.

Instructions: Define the centre of the circle.


Indicate the tangent (line or arc).

TWO TANGENTS AND RADIUS

Purpose: To allow the user to define a circle with two tangents and a
radius.

Instructions: Indicate first tangent (line).


Enter the radius in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Indicate second tangent (line).

THREE TANGENTS

Purpose: To allow the user to define a circle with three tangents.

Instructions: Indicate first tangent (line).


Indicate second tangent (line).
Indicate third tangent (line).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:94 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

POINT, RADIUS AND TANGENT

Purpose: To allow the user to define an arc with an end point, a radius and
a tangent.

Instructions: Enter the radius in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Define the start point of the arc.
Indicate the tangent.

CONIC

Purpose: To allow the user to define a conic or ellipse in different ways.

Instructions: Select Insert / Conic followed by the wanted conic definition


mode

CIRCUMSCRIBED RECTANGLE

Purpose: To allow the user to define an ellipse using the circumscribed


rectangle.

Instructions: Define first corner of the rectangle.


Define opposite corner of the rectangle.

MAJOR AND MINOR AXIS

Purpose: To allow the user to define an ellipse using the major and minor
axes.

Instructions: Define centre of ellipse (axis intersection).


Define end point of first semi-axis.
Define end point of second semi-axis.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:95 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

FOCAL POINTS AND MAJOR AXIS

Purpose: To allow the user to define an ellipse using the two focal points
and the length of the major axis.

Instructions: Define first focal point.


Enter the length of the major axis in the value field in the
Geometry toolbar.
Define second focal point.

FOCAL POINTS AND PERIPHERY POINT

Purpose: To allow the user to define an ellipse using the two focal points
and a point on the periphery.

Instructions: Define first focal point.


Define second focal point.
Define point on ellipse periphery.

SEGMENT DATA

Purpose: To allow the user to define a conic segment using start point, end
point, amplitude vector and a form factor.

Instructions: Define start point of segment.


Define end point of segment.
Define end point of amplitude vector.
Key in the form factor (Greater or equal to 0.0, less than 1.0).

END POINTS, SLOPE AND PERIPHERY POINT

Purpose: To allow the user to define a conic segment using the two end
points, slopes and a point on the periphery.

Instructions: Define start point of segment.


Define end point of segment.
Define end point of start slope vector.
Define end point of end slope vector.
Define point on segment periphery.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:96 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

POLYLINE

Purpose: To allow the user to define a polyline segment in different ways.

Instructions: Select Insert / Polyline followed by the wanted polyline


definition mode. It is possible to switch polyline definition mode
while defining a polyline.

TWO POINTS

Purpose: To allow the user to define a polyline segment as a line segment.

Instructions: Define the end point of the line segment.

DIRECTION AND LENGTH

Purpose: To allow the user to define a polyline segment as a line, given by


direction and length.

Instructions: Enter the length in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Define the endpoint of the direction vector.

THREE POINTS

Purpose: To allow the user to define a polyline segment as an arc using


three points (last point of previous segment used as first point).

Instructions: Define a periphery point on the arc.


Define the end point of the arc.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:97 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

TWO POINTS AND AMPLITUDE

Purpose: To allow the user to define a polyline segment as an arc using


two end two points and amplitude (last point of previous segment
used as first point).

Instructions: Enter the amplitude in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Instead of giving an explicit amplitude, the value 'Indicate" can be
selected from the combo box.
Define the end point of the arc. The resulting arc will be defined
with given amplitude.
If the amplitude has been defined implicit (as 'Indicate') a third
point is required to give the amplitude.

TWO POINTS AND RADIUS

Purpose: To allow the user to define a polyline segment using two end
points and radius (last point of previous segment used as first
point).

Instructions: Enter the radius in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Define the end point of the arc. The resulting arc will be defined
with given radius.

TOLERANCE

Purpose: To allow the user to define a tolerance used when defining an arc
in a polyline. Arc segments with amplitude less than a stipulated
tolerance will be considered as a line segment by the system.

Instructions: Key in the wanted tolerance.

ZAP

OPERATION COMPLETE

Purpose: To enable the User to specify to the system that all input required
for a particular function or activity within a function has been
completed.

Instructions: In the Zap menu, click Operation Complete.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:98 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

QUIT

Purpose: To enable a User to abort the currently invoked function,


disregarding the input given so far

Instructions: In the Zap menu, click Quit.

CANCEL

Purpose: To enable a User to step back in the sequence of input in the


currently invoked function

Instructions: In Zap menu, click Cancel.

OPTIONS

Purpose: To enable the User to get access to optional functionality at a


certain stage within a particular function.

Instructions: In Zap menu, click Options.

ALL

Purpose: Some functions can affect all determinate object types in the
entire drawing. All is used to enable the User to select all objects
in the drawing when the running function requires selection.

Instructions: In Zap menu, click All.

SUBPICTURE LEVEL

VIEW

Purpose: For view level selection during the indication of a subpicture.

Instructions: In the Zap menu, click Subpicture Level, then View.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:99 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SUBVIEW

Purpose: For subview level selection during the indication of a subpicture.

Instructions: In the Zap menu, click Subpicture Level, then Subcomponent.

COMPONENT

Purpose: For component level selection during the indication of a


subpicture.

Instructions: In the Zap menu, click Subpicture Level, then Component.

SUBCOMPONENT

Purpose: For subcomponent level selection during the indication of a


subpicture.

Instructions: In the Zap menu, click Subpicture Level, then Subcomponent.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:100 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

TOOLS

MODEL

PRESENT

Purpose: This function is used when a model in the drawing shall be


presented in one of the following ways:
1. Sectioning
2. Volume

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model, then Present.


The prompt is: 'Select a model part'. It is possible to choose level
2 (one model part or level 1 (all in the view)). The process of
collecting model parts continues while the User clicks Operation
Complete. The next Multiple choice window gives three ways of
presentation. The User can select:
1. Sectioning.
The system needs a projection from which to create
subpicture with section of model parts. This projection is
fetched from existing. The prompt is: 'Indicate an existing
view (OPTIONS for new)'. When the projection is chosen,
the User must give the plan of sectioning. This plan is
perpendicular to the screen and passes through a line
defined by two points in the selected view. When this is
done, the next options are available:
• Display
Shows on the display zoomed subpicture with section of
the selected model parts.
• Save subpicture
Saves the subpicture with User given name of
Subpicture DB.
• Add to drawing.
Adds the subpicture to the current drawing as subpicture
level 1
2. Volume.
Select model parts and choose level. Click Operation
Complete. The system calculates the volume of selected
model parts and presents the result on the display.

Options: None.

Result: The model in the drawing is presented as per user requirements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:101 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CROSS SECTION

Purpose: Function gives the true cross section of an indicated longitudinal


or transversal at a selected cursor position.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model, then Cross Section.


The User needs two different orthogonal model views contain
longitudinal or transversal (for example XY and XZ). The prompt
in the message window is: Indicate long/trans. Click on
Longitudinal or Transversal in one of the views. You will see in
the second view direction line parallel to the third coordinate axis.
On this line you must select a point that defines the location of
the section along the third coordinate

Options: None.

Result: The system calculates cross section contour and represent it in


the first model view.

PANEL INTERSECT

Purpose: This function is used to place symbols in a drawing in order to


show which one of two intersecting panels is penetrating.
Different symbols are used if a panel section in a view is
penetrating or being penetrated.
The size of the symbol is decided by the default height for
symbols as defined in the default file of Drafting. The colour of
the symbol is the default colour for notes.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:102 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EXCHANGE

Purpose: This function is to enable a User to exchange one or more model


parts in the current drawing with model parts from the data bank.

Instructions: The User commences this process by identifying the model part
to be replaced with the aid of the cursor and clicking the left-hand
button on the mouse once. The user can also click the Options
button and type in the name of the model to exchange.
The system responds by drawing a small box around the
selected part, in the view that the User has chosen in order to
make the identification, and then by presenting the User with a
simple 'Question' dialog box in which he can signify if the
identification is correct.
If the User then keys-in 'Yes', signifying that the correct part has
been identified, he is then presented with a 'Multiple Choice'
dialog box asking the User to identify which actual part is to be
exchanged, namely 'All', 'Confirm one by one', or 'Only indicated'.
This is to allow for the possibility that there may be more than
one model part of the same name in the region that was
originally indicated by the User.
The system then presents the User with a simple Dialog box
containing the names of possible replacement parts and from
which the User is required to select the appropriate one.

Options: There are no options available within this function.

Result: A model part within a drawing is exchanged for another model


part contained within the data bank.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:103 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

COPY

Purpose: To copy to an arbitrary number of models in the current drawing


to another model view.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model, then Copy.


First, the user is requested to collect all models that should be
copied. This is done by an arbitrary number of indications in the
drawing, completed by Operation Complete. After the first
indication the user is prompted to select level of collection: all
models in the view (level 1) or just the specific model indicated
(level 2). This level selection will then be the default one in
succeeding indications. Click Options to go back to level
selection.
When the collection of models is completed, the user is
prompted to indicate the target view, i.e. the view to which the
models will be copied. Once indicated, the models are copied to
this view and then automatically transformed according the
current transformation of the view.
To create a new target view, click Options when the user is
prompted to indicate the target view. The projection of the new
view is then defined by the user, where after the models are
copied to this view and transformed interactively by the user to
desired position and scale.

Options: None.

Result: A number of user-collected models will be copied to an arbitrary


model view.

MODEL VIEW

Purpose: This function provides a range of sub-functions that enables the


User to add-to and amend various attributes to a drawing.

Instructions: The User is presented with a Model View sub menu from which
he can select a function, or series of functions, that meet his
requirements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:104 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: The User is presented with the following optional functions:


• Exchange
• Clear
• AutoScale
• AutoScale All
• Change projection
• Slice
• Clear
• Explode
• Validate
• Hull symmetry

Result: All of these sub-functions will end with all or part of the view
being redrawn with the new attribute.

EXCHANGE

Purpose: This function is used to exchange all models of a specific type in


a User-indicated model view.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model View, then Exchange.


The view to exchange is indicated by the User. To treat all model
views, click All. After the view selection, the model type to treat
within the view, is selected from a multiple-choice dialog (the All
choice is available). If the model type selection involves Hull
specific models, the source of draw code is given by the User
(either from model or default settings).

Options: None.

Result: The selected views are exchanged.

AUTOSCALE

Purpose: To scale a view in a drawing. Can be used in a drawing form with


predefined views, that contains projection information

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model View, then AutoScale.


Indicate view to be scaled. Click All to scale all views at once.

Options: None.

Result: The indicated views are scaled and fitted to its predefined size in
the form.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:105 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

AUTSCALE ALL

Purpose: To scale all views at once. Can be used in a drawing form with
predefined views that contains projection information.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model View, then AutoScale All.

Options: None.

Result: All views are scaled and fitted to its predefined size in the form.

2D RESTRICTION

Purpose: To modify the 2D restriction settings for a view.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model View, then 2D Restriction.


Indicate the view to be modified. The 2D restriction dialogue is
displayed. Here it i possible to:
1. Modify the view frame: either key in the coordinates or click
the Modify Frame… button. Then it is possible to indicate the
corners of the view frame on the screen.
2. Delete the 2D restriction frame: click the Delete Frame
button.
3. Define whether the view should be clipped or not. If Apply
Clipping is checked then the program will ask if you want to
trim away geometry outside the view frame. Apply clipping
will also set a clipping attribute in the view which activates
clipping in the update design/update all operations.
4. Define whether the 2D restriction window should have a fixed
position or if it should adjust to a new position of the view
when it is moved. If you choose the fixed position, by
checking Fixed Position, the restriction window stays in the
same position when you move the view. If you then move
models outside the restriction window when clipping is
activated they will disappear (outfitting models) when you do
an update design. If the restriction window does not have a
fixed position it will follow when you transform the view.
However it will not adjust to scaling, the size of the restriction
window remains the same.

Options: None.

Result: The 2D restriction settings for the view will be modified.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:106 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CHANGE PROJECTION

Purpose: This function is used to change the projection of a user-indicated


model view.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model View, then Change Projection.
Indicate model view to be changed. The next possibilities for
defining the projection are shown in the window Choose option:
• Same As View.
Indicate an existing view in the drawing, and the projection
will be the same as in the indicated view.
• Point Vector.
Indicate a point in the projection plane, and a vector defining
the normal to that plane.
• Three Points.
Indicate a point in the projection plane, and two vectors
defining the U-axis and the V-axis of the projection plane.
• Two Cursor Positions.
Two cursor indications in an existing view define the U-axis
of the new projection; the V-vector is the same as the
normal to the projection indicated. A third cursor indication
defines the normal, and thereby the observer side, of the
new projection plane.
• 3D Rotate.
Starting from an existing view, the User defines the new
projection by rotating around the co-ordinate axes. This can
be done either in predefined steps, or in arbitrary steps via
keyboard input. The resulting projection is shown with a
small coordinate system and can be applied to the view by
Operation complete.
• Predefined Projection.
There is a possibility to define 5 standard projections in the
default handling, and each of these is displayed and is
accessible as a direct choice.
Select either one of the ways to define projection or predefined
projection.
If the drawing is an Assembly ADP drawing (a drawing generated
by the Assembly ADP utility) the system will ask you if you want
to re-run tasks. This will regenerate the labels and the bounding
box that was created by the Assembly ADP.
Please note that these tasks are a part of the Assembly ADP
application and they will only work if you are in Marine Drafting. It
will not work in Hull Design.

Options: None.

Result: The selected view changes its projection as per User’s choice.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:107 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

UPDATE DESIGN

Purpose: To allow the user to update design models in selected views.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Update Design.


Select the view to update. Click Operation Complete to exit the
function.

Options: Click All to update all views in the drawing.

Result: The design models in the indicated model views are updated.

UPDATE ANNOTATIONS

Purpose: To allow the user to update annotations in selected views.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Update Annotations.


Select the view to update. Click Operation Complete to exit the
function.

Options: Click All to update all views in the drawing.

Result: The annotations in the indicated model views are updated.

UPDATE ALL

Purpose: To allow the user to update everything in selected views.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Update All.


Select the view to update. Click Operation Complete to exit the
function.

Options: Click All to update all views in the drawing.

Result: Everything in the indicated model views are updated.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:108 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SLICE

Purpose: This function is used to present a 'sliced', or 'unsliced', version of


a user-indicated view.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Slice.


First, the view to slice is indicated by user. The system will then
present the current slice information (if any) in this view and also
highlight it in all other views in the drawing. The slice limits are
defined by two cutting planes parallel to the view. The cutting
planes, in turn, are defined by two positions in another
(perpendicular) view. After the view selection, the system
prompts for two positions in another (perpendicular) view
defining the slice limit. To unslice the model view, click
Operation Complete when the system asks for a point in the
first slicing plane.
Here is a restriction regarding outfitting models: the slice has no
effect when the view type is ‘wireline’ or ‘wireline hidden line’.
Please select another view type. You can change the view type
in the Marine Drawing Explorer: select the view in the tree
control, right click and select Properties.

Options: None.

Result: The indicated model views are sliced.

SPLIT

Purpose: This function moves a selection of model sub-views to a new


view with the same properties as the source view (i.e. the same
projection, position, scale etc.). This function is different from the
Tools > Subpicture > Split function in the way that it is
dedicated for model views and will also update the ID-lists of
both source and target views.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Split


You will now be prompted to indicate model sub-views. Please
note that all the model sub-views must be selected from the
same view. Finish your selection with Operation Complete. The
system will now create a new view with exactly the same
properties as the source view. The selected models will be
removed from the source view and added to the target view.
Finally you will get the possibility to transform the new view;
move it and change the scale for instance.

Options: None.

Result: The indicated model sub-views are moved to a new view.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:109 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CLEAR

Purpose: This function is used to empty the contents of the User-indicated


model view.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Clear.


Indicate model view to be cleared. Before the view is cleared, the
User must confirm the operation. If you wish to clear all views in
the current drawing, click All instead of indicating a view.

Options: None.

Result: The indicated view is cleared.

EXPLODE

Purpose: This function gives the User a possibility to explode models into
their parts. It is also possible to 'undo' a previous exploded view.
The function is limited to handle the following models:
• Plane panel
• Curved panel
• Longitudinal
• Transversal
• Outfitting.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Explode.


The explode factor is keyed in by the User. This factor controls
the degree of disassembly to be applied on the components
within each model. By clicking Options here, the function will
switch to 'implode' mode, i.e. prepare for undoing previously
exploded model information. The model information to explode
(implode) is indicated by User. If the function already is in
'explode' mode, click Options to get access to some options
ruling the explode process. When accessing the explode options,
a multiple choice dialog pops up presenting the following
alternatives:
• Explode view: Treats whole views (default).
• Explode model: Treats single models.
• Panel status: To control if profiles and brackets should stay
on panel or be part of the explode process.
• Picture size: The size of the model view after explosion
could be kept (scale changed) or enlarged (scale
unchanged).
When function is in explode mode, click Options (before
indicating the model to explode) to get access to the options
ruling the explode process.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:110 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: Click Options in the Explode model dialog to switch from


explode to implode. Click Options to switch back from implode
to explode mode

Result: The selected model parts or views are exploded with the explode
factor given by the User (or imploded).

Note: Measurements in a drawing will be ignored by the


Explode function. Creating linear measurements
referring to different exploded models is meaningless.

Note: Model functions as Exchange Model. Input Model,


Hidden Line Removal etc., will redraw even exploded
models ignoring the explode information.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:111 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

VALIDATE

Purpose: This tool is used to track and optionally exchange all "out-of-
date" models in the current drawing. The validation tool will also
track and optionally remove all models in the drawing that is not
found in the data bank.
Note that the criteria for 'out-of-date' is controlled by time stamps
solely: a model is considered 'out-of-date' if the creation date of
the model in the drawing is older that the date of the model in the
data bank. This means that a model may be considered out-of-
date, even if the graphic representation in the drawing will be the
same after exchange.
It is possible to let the system automatically validate the drawing
when brought in from the data bank (via File/Open).The value of
the default keyword VALIDATE_MODELS_WHEN_OPEN_DWG
controls this:
• No
No validation (system value)
• Confirm
Validate drawing but let user confirm the exchange/remove
operations
• Yes
Validate drawing and exchange/remove without user
confirmation

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Validate.


The system prompts to indicate model view to validate. The User
can validate all views in the current drawing by clicking All.
Window with list of possibly out-of-date models appears. Here
you can choose what to validate or all models in the list. When
validation procedure is performed, new list in the window shows
the models that are not found in the data bank. Now you can
select what to remove from the drawing or all models in the list.
Then click OK to return in the first step: indicate model view to
validate (All is available). Click Operation Complete to finish. If
there are no models in the indicated view that do not exist in the
data bank, the system gives message: 'All models in the model
view(s) are valid'.

Options: None.

Result: Models in may be exchanged from data bank. Invalid (non


existing in the databank) models may be deleted from the
drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:112 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

HULL SYMMETRY

Purpose: To change 'Hull symmetry' property of a model view with hull


model parts, those are designed as symmetric. The idea of this
property is to show PS, SB or both hull model parts in the same
view by changing from Symmetry to PS or SB and vice versa.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Hull Symmetry.
If in the view are inserted B (both P and S) hull model parts, the
property Hull Symmetry can be changed to P or S by this
function. The system prompts to indicate model view.
Subsequently the system presents Select view Symmetry
dialog with three alternatives:
• Symmetric
• PS
• SB
Choose one of them. Indicate another view to change symmetry
or Operation complete to finish the function.
The result can be seen after exchanging the view

Options: None.

Result: In the exchanged views all hull symmetric model parts are shown
as is chosen in the 'Select view Symmetry' dialog.

BACKDROP

Purpose: This function is used to define any 2D view that is a Level 1


subpicture, as a backdrop.

Instructions: In Tools menu, click Backdrop.


Indicate the 2D structure to use as backdrop. The system
responds with simple graphics dialog in which You can choose
projection for the backdrop. The next prompt is 'Cursor position'.
Indicate point to be referred to model space. (2D point mode
toolbars are available). Key in X, Y and Z. coordinates. Finally,
the current scale is fetched from the view, presented to the user
and made possible to update in case not correct. Thus the
backdrop will be connected to specific location in the model
space with defined projection.

Options: None.

Result: The subpicture will be recognised by the system as an ordinary


model view. Subsequently when placing equipment in a model
view that contains a backdrop, then these items will be initially
placed in the backdrop position and all further transformations
can be done in 2D.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:113 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SUBPICTURE

CURRENT

Purpose: This function allows the user to predefine the current subpicture
to which subsequent user-added geometric information will
belong to.
When adding geometric information to the drawing, the structural
positioning, i.e. which subpicture the added information will
belong to, depends on what kind of information that are to be
added and the circumstances under which the adding is taking
place. Some information, like dimensioning components, will
always belong to the same structure as the (first) item involved in
the calculations. In other situations, like restoring of subpictures,
the user is explicitly prompted to indicate the owner of the
subpicture.
There are still other situations, where the structural positioning
depends on the current subpicture, i.e. the owner structure is
supposed to have been defined in advance. This function allows
the user to predefine the current subpicture in such situations
and thereby add information to any part of the drawing. A
subpicture can be made current either by indicating an existing
subpicture or by creating a new one. The current drawing scale
will always equal the scale of this subpicture. It is possible to
redefine the drawing scale to use when new views (level-1
subpictures) are created. In this case a new view with this scale
will be created and made current, independently of what
subpicture that was current before this operation. The current
subpicture is modal, i.e. it is valid until it is redefined by the user.

If no information about the current subpicture has been given by


the user, the system will create a default structure and make this
structure the current one. It is always possible to change the
drawing structure at a later stage by using the functions Split
Subpicture and Regroup Subpicture.
The current subpicture structure may also be set to Automatic.
This means that there is no predefined current subpicture; it must
be derived each time the information is added. The automatic
structural positioning may roughly be derived in two ways,
depending on the circumstances. In most cases where the user
has the possibility to indicate the geometric position of the
information, by using the cursor, this position is used to derive
the structural position by somehow finding the "closest"
subpicture. In the rest of the cases, in which there always exists
some kind of "original", this original will define the structural
position. If the current subpicture is set to automatic, the current
scale can of course not be predefined but will equal the scale of
the subpicture, derived as above.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:114 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Below, all Geometric-Information-Adding functions that rely on


the current subpicture information, will be listed. Furthermore,
the way to find the structural positioning when the current
structure is set to automatic is given.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Current.


Information about the current subpicture will be reported and a
multiple choice dialog containing the following alternatives will
show up:
• Existing component
• New subpicture (auto)
• New subpicture (manual)
• New view
• Automatic

Existing component
The subpicture to become the current one is indicated by the
user.

New subpicture (auto)


A new subpicture, with level decided by the system, will be
created and made the current one. The owner of the new
subpicture is indicated by the user. If the owner contains model
information, a new component will be created, otherwise a
subview.

New subpicture (manual)


A new subpicture, with level decided by the user, will be created
and made the current one. The owner of the new subpicture is
indicated by the user. To create a new view, click Options here.
Depending on the level of the owner, a new view, subview or
component will be created. If a new view is created, the scale will
be fetched from the Default Keyword PICT_DEF_SCALE.

New view
A new view will be created and made the current one. The scale
of the view is supplied by the user (the current scale is
proposed).

Automatic
The current subpicture will be derived automatically each time it
is needed.

Options: None.

Result: The current subpicture will be redefined, according to user’s


action.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:115 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SAVE

Purpose: To save a subpicture in the current drawing in the Subpicture


data bank, or any other data bank.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Save.

Identifying the subpicture


The subpicture to save can be identified in two ways:
• By indicating the subpicture. To identify by name instead,
click Cancel.
• By keying in the name of the subpicture. If the drawing
contains more that one subpicture with the given name, You
have to confirm which one to save. To identify by cursor
instead, just type an empty Return.

Establishing the external name


Before saving the subpicture, You are prompted to supply the
external name (as saved in the data bank) in a dialog box (if the
subpicture has a name, this one will be proposed by the system).
If a subpicture with the same name already exists in the data
bank, You have to confirm the overwriting before the subpicture
is saved.

Saving the subpicture


If the subpicture contains drawing components (like
dimensionings, notes etc.), You are informed about this and
decide if these also should be saved.
For obvious reasons, the subpicture must be saved in a neutral
format (i.e. not transformed) in the data bank. Now, the system
has accumulated every transformation that has been applied on
the subpicture during its lifetime. To achieve neutral format, the
inverse of this transformation history will be applied to the
subpicture before saving it. Note that the transformation history
of a subpicture can be viewed and optionally redefined in the
function Redefine Transformation.

Options: To save on a data bank, other then the initially system-proposed,


click Options while identifying the subpicture. The system will
then let You key in the name of another data bank (the name of
the current data bank is proposed).

Result: The user-given subpicture is saved in the data bank, in a neutral


format with any transformations that may have been made to it
during its lifetime effectively reversed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:116 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SAVE AS STD DETAIL

Purpose: To save a subpicture in the current drawing as a detail in the


Standard Detail Book (details reside as subpictures of level 1-3
(view, subview or component) in the Standard data bank).

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Save as Std Detail.
Identifying the subpicture
The subpicture to save can be identified in two ways:
• By indicating the subpicture. To identify by name instead,
click Cancel.
• By keying in the name of the subpicture. If the drawing
contains more that one subpicture with the given name, You
have to confirm which one to save. To identify by cursor
instead, just type an empty Return.

Joining the book


Once the subpicture has been identified, it should be registered
as a detail in the Standard Detail Book. This is done by giving the
page, followed by the detail number within this page.
First, all existing pages in the book are presented in a dialog,
from where the desired page is selected by user. If the user
wants to create a new page, or update the description of an
existing page, click Options. The system will then ask the user to
key in the number of the page of interest, where after the page
description is supplied by user (if the page already exists, the old
description is proposed).
Once the page is given, all details within this page are presented
in a dialog, from where the desired one is selected by user. Non-
existing details are revealed by the description
"<not defined>".
Once selected, the system will then ask the user to supply/
update the description for this detail (if the detail already exists,
the old description is proposed).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:117 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Saving the detail


If the subpicture contains drawing components (like
dimensionings, notes etc.), You are informed about this and
decide if these also should be saved. If the detail already exists
in the data bank, the You must confirm the overwriting before the
detail is saved.
For obvious reasons, the subpicture must be saved in a neutral
format (i.e. not transformed) in the data bank.
Now, the system has accumulated every transformation that has
been applied on the subpicture during its lifetime. To achieve
neutral format, the inverse of this transformation history will be
applied to the subpicture before saving it. Note that the
transformation history of a subpicture can be viewed and
optionally redefined in the function Redefine Transformation.

Options: None.

Result: The user-given subpicture is saved as a detail in the Standard


Detail Book, in a neutral format with any transformations that
may have been made to it during its lifetime effectively reversed.

SAVE AS STD HATCH PATTERN

Purpose: To allow a User to store a new hatch pattern in the Standard


Hatch Pattern Book such that it can then be made available for
subsequent general usage.

Instructions: The pattern that the User has created must currently exist as a
level-3 sub-picture and the User initiates the process by
identifying either by name or with the aid of the screen cursor.
The user can toggle between these by clicking the Options
button.
Once the component/pattern has been identified it must be
registered as a pattern within the Hatch Pattern Book. This is
undertaken by giving the page number in the book, followed by
the pattern identifying description to be the used for future
referencing.
The system presents all of the existing pages in a dialog box and
the User is required to input the number of the page that suits his
purpose. The User is able to create a new page or to update the
description of an existing page by selecting the Options button
and inputting the required information.
If an existing page number is given by the User, all patterns
contain within that page are presented to the User in a dialog
box. Patterns are provided with a description and non-existing
patterns are revealed by the description not defined. The system
will ask the User to input the description for the new pattern.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:118 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: There are no other options available within this function.

Result: A new pattern is stored within the Standard Hatch Pattern Book.

SAVE TO SDB

Purpose: To save a sub-picture in the current drawing in the SDB file


format.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Sub-picture, then Save to SDB.

Identifying the sub-picture


The sub-picture to save can be identified in two ways:
• By indicating the sub-picture. To identify by name instead,
click Cancel.
• By keying in the name of the sub-picture. If the drawing
contains more than one sub-picture with the given name,
you have to confirm which one to save. To identify by cursor
instead, just type an empty Return.

Select the name of the file and the sub-picture


Before saving the sub-picture, you are prompted to select the
name and location of the resulting SDB file. The file name will
also be the name of the sub-picture. Please note that the file
system has limitations regarding what characters can be
included in the file name so the same limitations apply to the sub-
picture name.

Dimensions etc
If the sub-picture contains drawing components (like dimensions,
notes etc.), you are informed about this and you can choose if
these also should be saved.

Transformation
For obvious reasons, the sub-picture must be saved in a neutral
format (i.e. not transformed) in the data bank. Now, the system
has accumulated every transformation that has been applied on
the sub-picture during its lifetime. To achieve neutral format, the
inverse of this transformation history will be applied to the sub-
picture before saving it. Note that the transformation history of a
sub-picture can be viewed and optionally redefined in the
function Redefine Transformation.

Options: None

Result: The user-given sub-picture is saved in the selected file. The sub-
picture will have the same name as the file. Any transformations
that may have been made to it during its lifetime is effectively
reversed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:119 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EXCHANGE

Purpose: To enable a User to exchange a sub-picture within a drawing with


another one that is in the data bank.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Exchange.


The user is asked to indicate the subpicture to exchange. By
clicking Options the user can instead key in the name of the
subpicture to exchange.
If more than one copy of the sub-picture is found within the
drawing, then the system provides the options:
1. All
2. Confirm one by one
4. Only indicated
It is then possible to identify which ones are to be exchanged and
the system requests input of the name of the new sub-picture
that is to replace those that are to be exchanged.
If the sub-pictures that are to be exchanged within a drawing are
replaced by more than one different sub-picture, then this will
require multiple use of this function.

Options: There are no other options within this function.

Result: Sub-pictures are exchanged by other sub-pictures within the


data bank.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:120 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

RENAME

Purpose: To enable a User to rename a subpicture in the current drawing.

Instructions: The subpicture that is to be renamed can be identified in two


ways:
• by indicating the subpicture with the aid of the screen
cursor, and
• by keying in the name of the subpicture.
In order to identify the subpicture by its previously assigned
name, it is first necessary to click the Options button. If the
drawing contains more than one subpicture with the supplied
name then the User must confirm the one that is to be renamed.
If the User has identified the subpicture through direct screen
interaction he is then required to identify the level of the
subpicture that he has selected to rename. Otherwise all levels
within the subpicture are automatically selected in order to be
subsequently renamed.
The system displays the name of the selected subpicture.
The User is required to key in the new name for the subpicture
and the renamed picture is then stored in the databank.

Options: There are no other options available within this function.

Result: The subpicture in the databank is renamed. It is to be noted that


system-defined names, such as nodal names, cannot be
renamed by this operation.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:121 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

REDEFINE TRANSFORMATION

Purpose: This function is used to display and possibly redefine the


transformation history of user-indicated subpictures. The
transformation history is used by the system to map between
world and drawing coordinates. This is necessary to maintain
consistency within the drawing, such as for example
• exchanging subpictures
• saving or inserting subpictures
• retrieving the scale of subpictures
The transformation history is automatically maintained by the
system and is normally no subject for user redefinition. There
are, however, circumstances in which such a redefinition is
justified, namely when the user wants to control the neutral
format of subpictures saved in the data bank. See help about
Insert Subpicture for a discussion of this neutral format.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Redefine


Transformation.

Viewing the History


The subpicture of interest is indicated by user. Once indicated, a
multiple choice dialog presenting the transformation history will
appear. The history includes the following attributes:
• Reflection
(None/U-axis/V-axis)
• Rotation angle
(in degrees)
• Scale
(absolute)
It should be mentioned that the translation also is a part of the
history. Because this attribute should be of no interest for the
user, it is hidden and hence cannot be redefined explicitly by
user.
It should be mentioned that the translation also is a part of the
history. Because this attribute should be of no interest for the
user, it is hidden and hence cannot be redefined explicitly by
user.
When ready, click Cancel to view another history, or Quit to
leave this function.
To redefine the history, select the appropriate attribute for
update.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:122 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Redefining the History


To redefine the reflection, select the Reflection alternative. A
new dialog showing the possible alternatives will appear:
1. None
2. U-axis
5. V-axis
Select between None, U-axis and V-axis.
To redefine the rotation, select the Rotation alternative. The
desired angle, in degrees, is then keyed in by user (the current
value is proposed by the system).
To redefine the scale, select the Scaling alternative. The desired
scale factor is then keyed in by user. A scale factor given as a
single value (i.e. not containing ':' or '/') is always interpreted
reciprocally (both 50 and 1:50 means 0.02).
The redefinition will be applied on the subpicture instantly and
the resulting transformation history will be presented to the user.

Example of Justified Use


As mentioned above, the use of this function could be justified as
a necessary step prior to saving of a subpicture on the data
bank. Now, imagine that the user wants to fetch a subpicture in
the data bank, modify it somewhat and finally save it back in the
data bank. Lets assume the following steps:
• Fetch the subpicture, using the function Insert Subpicture
• Rotate the subpicture 45 degrees, using the function
Transform Subpicture. When applied, the transformation
history of the subpicture will be updated with this rotation.
• Save it back in the data bank, using the function Save
Subpicture
The result of the save operation is nothing! This is because the
45 degree rotation, applied on the subpicture, was automatically
added to the transformation history as well. When saving it back
in the data bank, the inverse of the transformation history was
applied on the subpicture to make it saved in neutral format. The
user modification was lost!
To force the system to include the user modification in the data
bank, You have to make the system forget this modification
before storing the subpicture. This is done by redefining the
transformation history of the subpicture. Just decrease the
rotation angle of the subpicture with 45 degrees before storing it
in the data bank.

Options: None.

Result: The transformation history is displayed and possibly updated by


the user.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:123 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

REGROUP

Purpose: This function is used to reorganise the structure of the drawing.


In this operation a 'part' of the drawing can be moved from its
'present' owner to another owner. In this manner components
can be reorganised, for example, into different subpictures, thus
facilitating subsequent manipulation and storage, etc. Parts of
drawings can be moved in five different ways, namely:

Instructions: The first step, regardless of the actual re-grouping process itself,
is to indicate the new owner and to choose the required level.
The 'owner' can be a complete subpicture in level 1-3. By clicking
the 'operation complete' icon when the User is prompted to
indicate the 'owner', a new subpicture on level 1 will be created
as the new 'owner'. Regroup confirmation can be turned on or off
with the Options button.
The system then presents the User with a simple multiple choice
dialog box containing:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:124 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: Within each of groups 4 and 5, the User has two sub-options to
control the select of entities for regrouping, namely

This action is controlled, that is 'set', by clicking the Set (CUT/


NOCUT) button in the multiple choice dialog box, until buttons 4
and 5 read accordingly. This performance can be swapped
interactively.

Result: (This function is not to simply reverse the effects of a 'splitting'


operation, however a User can achieve such a complete reversal
if he so wishes.)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:125 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SPLIT

Purpose: To enable the User to organise the contents of a sub-picture, if


required, at three 'levels'.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Split.


Indicate any entity on the drawing geometry that is to be 'split'.
The splitting operation, when completed, organises the total
information at three levels, namely:
• Level 1, denotes the full view
• Level 2, denotes a sub-view
• Level 3, denotes a component
Each level contains the information both at current and all lower
levels, level 3 being the lowest.
If the User selects an element that is on an external boundary
then the system automatically responds by drawing three
consecutive external boxes around the selected subpicture,
representing the three possible levels. This signifies that all
information is at 'level 1' only.
If the User selects an entity that is within the overall geometry
then the system responds by drawing a box, representing the
lowest level, that is level 3, around the internal elements, and
levels 1 and 2 boxes around the overall sub-picture again.
The User can select the level either by clicking the level number
icon on the Subpicture level toolbar or by simultaneously
clicking the keys CTRL and 'number' of the level, that is, 1, 2 or
3.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:126 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Following the selection of a level, the User is presented with a


Split menu from which to select

1. Auto
Selection of this option results in the system automatically
creating a separate 'owner' for each subordinate level.

2. Subordinate
In this case the User identifies the owner for each subordinate
layer.

8. Geometry
By use of this option, the User defines the 'owner' of individual
graphic entities. Thus the User can control the 'level' each
selected geometric entity is to be assigned, that is 'owned'.
This option may result in some geometric/text entities being split
between levels and thus discontinued at the lower level.

4. Polygon (CUT/NOCUT)
The User creates a new owner for all geometric entities inside a
user-defined rectangle/polygon.
If the option Polygon is set to (CUT), geometry that intersects the
restricting boundary will be partitioned prior to splitting (CUT) and
geometry totally inside restricting boundary will be processed.
If the option Polygon is set to (NOCUT), geometry that intersects
the restricting boundary will be ignored and only geometry totally
inside restricting boundary will be processed (NOCUT).

5. Area (CUT/NOCUT)
The User creates a new owner for all geometric entities inside a
general user-defined area.
If the option Polygon is set to (CUT), geometry that intersects the
restricting boundary will be partitioned prior to splitting (CUT) and
geometry totally inside the restricting boundary will be
processed.
If the option Polygon is set to (NOCUT), the geometry that
intersects the restricting boundary will be ignored and only
geometry totally inside restricting boundary will be processed
(NOCUT).

6. Set CUT/NOCUT
This option switches Polygon (CUT) and Area (CUT) to Polygon
(NOCUT) and Area (NOCUT).
When the function is invoked, the User can switch Split confirm
ON/OFF by Options before indicating a subpicture to split. If
Split confirm is set ON, the involved entities will be highlighted
prior to prompt for split confirmation.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:127 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: The indicated subpicture will be split as defined by the User.

VITESSE

RUN SCRIPT

Purpose: To allow the User open script with location defined by


SB_PYTHON in the project file.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Run Script.


In the Vitesse dialog box select desired script and click Open.

Options: None.

Result: The selected script is started and its name is added in the Script
Combo Box.

RUN SELECTED

Purpose: To allow the User run currently selected script in the Script
Combo Box.

Instructions: Select the script to be started in the Script Combo Box in the
Vitesse toolbar.
Then, in the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Run Selected.

Options: None.

Result: The chosen script is started.

FILES

Purpose: Contains recently started scripts.

Instructions: Select the script to be started in the Script Combo Box in the
Vitesse toolbar.
See RUN SELECTED.

Options: None.

Result: The chosen script is started.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:128 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EDIT

Purpose: To allow the User open script with location defined by


SB_PYTHON in the project file.

Instructions: Select the script to be opened in the Script Combo Box in the
Vitesse toolbar. Then, in the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then
Edit Script.
The script is opened. The editor can be chosen from Tools /
Vitesse / OPT. After editing save changes and close the editor.

Options: None.

Result: The changed script is ready for starting.

DEBUG

Purpose: To allow the User debug current script.

Instructions: Select script to be debugged in the Script Combo Box in the


Vitesse toolbar.
Then, in the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Debug.

Options: None.

LOG WINDOW

Purpose: To switch ON/OFF the Log window.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Log window.


The window can be opened when the User starts scripts and
reloads modules

Options: None.

Result: You can see the list of started scripts and events of reloading
modules.

RELOAD

Purpose: To reload the Python modules.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Reload modules.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:129 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: All Python modules are reloaded.

OPTIONS

Purpose: To allow the User choose options for the editor, log output,
debugging and number of recently running scripts

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Options.


The default editor is Notepad. File Associations mean OS choice
of the editor by file association. By Custom option in the text box
can be specified the program file name of the editor. An editor
with start parameters can be used also.
In the Logging options frame can be activated log output and
enabled when status window is not visible.
The text box Debug script name in the Other frame is used to
define the name of the script to debug. 'Number of recent scripts'
text box specifies the number of recently started scripts in the
Script Combo

Options: None.

Result: The script editor, Logging options, Debug script name and
number of recent scripts are defined according to the user's
choice.

STOP SCRIPT

Purpose: Terminate the currently running Vitesse script.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Stop Script.


Please note that it is only possible to stop a script while the script
is running a function that requires user input (e.g. point2D_req).

Options: None.

Result: The script is stopped.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:130 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

INQUIRY

MODEL

Purpose: To enable a User to obtain current information on a displayed


model.

Instructions: With the screen cursor the user must first select the model on the
drawing. The system will highlight the 'model' nearest to the
cursor when the left-hand button on the mouse is clicked. The
system then presents a simple dialog box that contains
information relevant to the selected model. The User can
continue to select further models within the drawing with the
system again presenting data on the selected model. By clicking
the Options button the user can get information on connection
points in the model.

Options: There are no other options available within this function.

Result: The User is presented with a list of information relevant to a


selected model in the current display.

NAME

Purpose: To provide the User with the name of a subpicture.

Instructions: With the screen cursor the User can select a local within the
screen and the system will determine the nearby subpicture.
The name of the subpicture is then displayed in the Message
Window, if currently displayed, at the bottom of the screen. The
user can further specify the name inquiry by clicking the Options
button.

Options: There are no other options available within this function.

Result: The User is provided with the name of the subpicture that he has
selected.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:131 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

VERIFY

Purpose: To provide the User with a list of the characteristics of selected


arbitrary geometry and its superior elements and subpictures.

Instructions: The User is required to identify on the screen the particular


geometry that he wishes to verify. This then causes the system to
create and display a dialog box listing:
• the geometric entities
• the superior elements, component, view, layer, etc.,
• the drawing title.

Options: The User can restrict the identification to a particular kind of


geometry by clicking the Options button and then selecting the
desired type from the dialog box that the system then presents to
him.

Result: A list of information relevant to the selected geometry within the


workspace is provided for the User's consideration and
information.

USED LAYERS

Purpose: To provide the User with a simple listing of the layers, and their
identification, which have been established for use within a
drawing.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry, then Used Layers.


On entering this function the User is presented with a simple
selection from which to choose, namely:
• All
• User defined
• System defined
If Layer 0 has been used then this will not be displayed in the list.
Following a selection by the User, the system displays a simple
list containing the identification of the layers that have been
established.

Options: None.

Result: The User can decide on the layer identification number for an
addition layer, or for additional layers.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:132 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

WORKSPACE

Purpose: To provide the User with a list of the names and the sizes of
objects which are currently residing in the workspace.

Instructions: Simply selecting this function causes the system to create and
display a dialog box containing:
• a pointer to each object
• the total size of each object, (in words)
• the used space within each object, (in words)
• the length of the name string
• the name of each object
• the grand total object size, (in words)
• the grand total used space, (again in words)

Options: There are no options available within this function.

Result: A list of information relevant to the contents within the workspace


is provided for the User's consideration and information.

DRAWING STATUS

Purpose: This function is used to display some general information about


the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry, then Drawing Status.


Information about the current drawing and modal settings is
listed in a dialog.

Options: None.

Result: General drawing information is displayed.

ATTRIBUTES

Purpose: To show the Attributes window, which lists all of the attributes of
the current element.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Attributes...

Options: None.

Result: The attributes window is displayed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:133 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Design Area Docs

Purpose: The design areas in a project, modelled using Space


Management, can have relevant links to design documents and
drawings with project design rules and decisions. This function
finds the space arrangement that is used for design areas by
using the logical variable AM_DESAREA_DOC and allows the
user to give a point in space by indicating in the drawing.
Documents linked to the selected design area are presented and
can be selected for viewing. Note that when linked drawings are
displayed, the currently open drawing is replaced on the canvas..
An alternative way to avoid this is to link drawings as e.g. TIF
files.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Design Area Docs.

Options: None.

Result: Relevant design documents are presented to the designer.

PROJECT

Purpose: To show the Query Project window, which provides information


about the current project. You can list Users, Teams, Databases,
MDB and Stamp elements.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Project...

Options: None.

Result: The Query Project window is displayed.

USER STATUS

Purpose: To show the User Status window, which provides information


about the users who are accessing the current project. You can
list Users by various filters and see user information and the
databases they are accessing.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then User Status...

Options: None.

Result: The User Status window is displayed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:134 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

DATA ACCESS CONTROL

Purpose: To show the Query Data Access Control window, which provides
information about the access the current user has to database
elements and attributes.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Data Access
Control...

Options: None.

Result: The Query Data Access Control window is displayed.

DB CHANGES

Purpose: To show the Database Changes window, which allow the user to
report on changes made to database elements since a particular
instance in time, or differences between the current state and a
previous state.
This window is the same as that called by the option Tools>DB
Listing… as described later.
The window functions for both options through the Control
menu.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then DB Changes...

Options: None.

Result: The DB Changes window is displayed.

GLOBAL COMMUNICATIONS

Purpose: Checks the communication when using global databases.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Global


Communications. This will check that a remote server is
reachable.

Options: None.

Result: Information about global communication status is received.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:135 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

GLOBAL LOCKING AND ISOLATION

Purpose: Check the Lock and Isolation state of all online global locations.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Global Locking and
Isolation. This will display the query location lock and isolation
dialog.

Options: None.

Result: Information about the state is received.

DRAWING FORM

OPEN

Purpose: To open an existing drawing form and make this the current
drawing. The drawing form is fetched from the Form data bank or
any other data bank. This function is used in combination with
the function Save to update an already existing drawing form, or
to create a new drawing form based on a modification of an
existing drawing form.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Drawing Form, then Open.


If a drawing already is current, You will be prompted to save this
drawing before the new one is opened.
In the object browser dialog that now appears, You are prompted
to key in the name of the drawing form. It is possible to browse
the contents of the Standard data bank by keying in a wild card
name.

Result: The drawing form will be converted to a general drawing and


renamed by prefixing the form name with "F_". The layout and
the set of rules can then be updated with ordinary tools, before
converting it back to a drawing form, using the function Save.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:136 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SAVE

Purpose: To convert the current drawing into a drawing form and save it in
the Standard data bank. Text insertion rules are defined in
interaction with the user.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Drawing Form, then Save.


The geometry in the drawing, except rule definition texts, will
make up the layout of the form. A rule definition text is a text
beginning with a "$" or a "@" followed by a running number that
denotes the identification (number) of the rule. Standard slant
and aspect of the text is assumed. The font, position, rotation
and height of the text are characteristics that will be saved
together with the rule description. Additional attributes
(adjustment, max number of characters etc.) will be defined by
user within this function.
A rule definition text can be of type single ($) or table (@). The
single text will contain only one row, while a table text may
contain several rows. The attribute data for a single text is the
adjustment and the max number of characters allowed. The table
text takes two more attributes, namely the max number of lines
and the interline space factor.
First, the user is prompted to key in the desired name of the
form. Note that this name cannot equal the name of the current
drawing. If an object with the same name already exists in the
data bank, You have to confirm the overwriting before the
drawing form is saved.
The user now gets a chance to supply the name of a reference
form. The rule attributes of this form can then be used in the form
about to save, if desired. If the form already exists in data bank,
this name will be proposed by the system. Note that the
reference form is not needed by the system; it just makes things
easier for the user. If a reference form has been supplied, the
system now asks if the rule parameters in the form about to save
should be defined automatically, via the reference form. This
means that only the attributes of rules not present in the
reference form must be defined explicit by user.
Next, the system will go through all rule definition texts in the
drawing to establish the definition for each rule, with or without
the assistance of the reference form. The attributes of rules that
can/should not be defined automatically must be supplied explicit
by the user. Predefined values will be proposed, if possible.
When the rule definition is completed, all rules will be listed in a
dialog. The user now gets the possibility to update the additional
attributes of any rule. Just key in the number of the rule, or select
the rule in the dialog list. The update session is completed with
an empty rule selection (or Cancel), where after the form will be
saved.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:137 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: The current drawing will be converted into a drawing form and
saved in the Form data bank.

SYMBOL

OPEN

Purpose: To enable a User to update an individual symbol.

Instructions: The User is presented with a simple dialog box containing the
various symbols and font sets that are currently available. With
the screen cursor, followed by clicking the left-hand button, the
User can select the symbol that is to be updated. The system
responds by drawing a simple rectangular box round the selecte
symbol.

If the user then clicks OK, the dialog box is then replaced on the
screen by an enlarged copy of the selected symbol, created in a
drawing form of size 511*511. This representation of the symbol
is held in a drawing named FONT<font number>SYMB<symbol
number>. It is to be noted that the original font and symbol
number will be save by the system, along with the drawing to be
used, when recreating the symbol.

The User can then update, modify, etc., this symbol using the
basic Drafting facilities of the system. In order to assist him the
symbol is automatically exploded, that is degenerated into its
original geometric elements, e.g. contours and chains.
Furthermore, the connections and text positions, if any and that
would have been established when the symbol was first created
and entered into the symbol file, will be shown as internal
symbols, showing the point and vector of each connection and
text position. The connections will be shown in white and the text
positions in red.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:138 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: The User can update and/or delete old connections and he can
add new connections. The system keeps track of the next free
connection number and allows the User to supply all necessary
information, namely:
• the connection point
• the connection vector
• the connection code
The adding of new connections is terminated by inputting the
command 'Operation Complete'.
The User can update and/or delete text positions and he can add
new text positions, in a similar manner as for the creation of a
new connection, except where supplying the relevant
information, namely:
• the text position
• the text vector
• the text position code
• the minimum height and width
The updating of text positions is terminated by inputting the
command Operation Complete.

Result: When the redefinition of the symbol has been completed, the
system will store the symbol in the 'symbol font' file and from
which it can be subsequently accessed for copying into a
drawing. The modified symbol will then be used in any drawing
that contains this symbol, including drawings that may have been
created before the modification was made.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:139 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SAVE

Purpose: To enable a User to create and save, in the system Symbol Font
file, a new symbol.

Instructions: The first task is to key-in, into the dialog box that appears on the
screen, the 'symbol font' ID number that is to be used, noting that
this must be unique and not one that is already used within the
'symbol font' set. When this input has been entered and the OK
button has been clicked, the display returns to the open drawing.
It is recommended that a drawing form of size 511*511 is used
when creating symbols from scratch. (This drawing form is
automatically created by the system when a symbol is fetched for
any subsequent updating.)
The User can then employ the full Drafting capability of the
system in order to create a symbol, inclusive of geometry and
text, which meets the design needs.
The 'symbol' object, when deemed by the User to be complete,
will then be scanned for 'contours' that define the shape of the
symbol. It is to be noted that geometric or text items that are
partly outside of the boundary of the drawing form will, after
verification, be omitted from the final symbol. Thus the User
needs to exercise some discipline in ensuring that the contours
and text that define the required symbol lay completely within the
drawing form. The User should note that in subsequent
applications of a symbol within a new drawing that he can, of
course, change the relative scale of the symbol at that time.
The total size of a single symbol is internally maximised by the
system and will be checked against the symbol shape definition.
If the system considers that the shape is too complicated, then
the User will receive an error message and the symbol creation
process will be aborted by the system. The User can reduce the
apparent 'complexity' of a symbol by 'chaining' geometric
elements together, as described in the corresponding Drafting
function.

Options: There are no other options available within this function.

Result: When the definition of the symbol has been completed, the
system will store the symbol in the Symbol font file, with an
appropriate graphic representation, and from which it can be
accessed at any time for copying into a drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:140 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

REMOVE

Purpose: To remove a symbol from the list of available fonts. (It is to be


noted that this is not the same as removing a symbol from a
drawing: this latter action is undertaken under Edit / Delete /
SYM.)

Instructions: The User is presented with a simple dialog box containing the
various symbols that are currently available. By selecting the font
number and horizontally scrolling, the User can select with the
cursor and the left-hand mouse button the symbol that is to be
deleted. The system draws a simple rectangular box around the
selected symbol.
If the user then clicks OK in this dialog box, the system asks him
to confirm that he really wishes to delete the selected symbol.
This Remove function should be used with care. When a symbol
is used within a drawing, only the reference to the symbol font,
together with any associated scaling, etc., information is held
within the electronic file version of the drawing, not a full copy of
the symbol itself. Only when a drawing is being displayed, or
plotted/printed in 'hard copy' form, is a full copy of the symbol
temporarily fetched from the symbol file. Thus deleting a symbol
from the symbol file may result in previously complied drawings
being inadvertently effected

Options: There are no other options within this function.

Result: The Symbol Font file is updated to meet the User’s current
requirements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:141 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

EXPLODE

Purpose: To explode a symbol into it's individual unconnected geometric


components. This function can be applied either with regard to
any symbol within the data bank of symbol fonts that are
provided for possible incorporation within drawings and require
modification in some manner, or at the stage when a symbol has
actually been incorporated within a drawing and requires
subsequent modification.

Instructions: Cursor-select the symbol that is to be exploded and click the left-
hand button once. The system responds by highlighting the
selected symbol. If the correct symbol has been identified then
cursor-select the 'operation complete' icon.
The User can then select any of the constituent geometric
elements of the original symbol and undertake any operations on
that original uncoupled element that may be deemed to be
necessary, e.g. delete it, move it, etc.
This facility provides a form of local control over the geometry of
the symbol. However it must be used with care as the various
components can no longer be manipulated in a contiguous
manner.

Options: There are no options within this function.

Result: The selected symbol within a display, and the associated


drawing, is exploded into its constituent geometric elements, with
no implied grouping or connectivity, without any change in locally
defined size and orientation, and the various elements stored as
individual entities within the drawing.

INSPECT DRAWING

Purpose: This is a data management facility that enables a User to


examine the full spectrum of information that is either contained
or is implicit within a drawing.

Instructions: On selecting this function the User is presented with a Multiple


Choice box and from which he can select the specific nature/
form of the data or information that he wishes to inspect. Some of
the choices lead the User to other dialog boxes and from which
he is required to make a further selection in order to more closely
determine the type of data and/or information that he requires to
examine.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:142 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: The initial Multiple Choice box presents the user with the
following alternatives, and in some cases, further selection
choices:
1. Recreate windows
Updates the sub-picture extension cache in the current drawing.
Note that this cache is normally kept up-to-date automatically by
the system. However, this is a way of forcing the cache to be
updated in case the automation for some reason has failed.
2. List object
Supervisor for listing the overall contents of the current drawing.
3. List element
Supervisor for listing/verifying the structural parts of the current
drawing.
4. Integrity check
Make sure no duplicate PADD references exist in the current
drawing.
Note that this functions is used for debugging purposes. The
normal state is that no duplicate PADD references exist.
5. Show windows
Supervisor for highlighting sub-picture or geometry extensions in
the current drawing.
6. Flag
Special function for making all information detectable and/or
possible to delete in the current drawing.
Aimed for debugging purposes.
7. Delete
Special function for deleting elements by pointer in the current
drawing
Aimed for debugging purposes
8. Performance
Supervisor for tuning the output to the graphical screen.
9. Purge
Removes obsolete sub-pictures (empty and non-vital) in the
current drawing.
10. Attributes
Supervisor for accessing attributes in the current drawing.
Aimed for debugging purposes

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:143 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

11. Change text code page


In some cases, text will not be displayed properly on drawings
migrated from Tribon M3 to AVEVA Marine (12 Series). It can be
due to that the codepage used to encode multibyte text has been
changed to UTF-8 in AVEVA Marine (12 Series). This function
displays a dialogue box presenting a list containing all texts
within the current drawing in order to correct such texts.

To convert one or more texts, check the associated check boxes


in the list and click the Convert… button. A second dialogue will
be displayed to let the user specify another code page than UTF-
8. The Preview window reflects what the resulting text will look
like.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:144 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

When the correct code page has been selected and the text is
readable, click OK and the texts in the list will be updated. To
update the texts in the drawing, click OK once more.
12. Remove dimensioning from PADD
To prevent un-persisted changes to be overwritten after a
subsequent evaluation of the dimensioning, it is possible to
remove the dimensioning from PADD before modifying it.
Note that when removing a dimensioning from PADD, the
associativity will permanently be lost and the sub-functions Move
dimension text, Text properties and Edit Dimension text
within the Modify/Dimension dialog will not apply anymore.

Result: The user is eventually presented with dialogue boxes that


contain detailed sets of data and information that should assist
the user in data management operations.

CLEAN WORKSPACE

Purpose: To enable a User to quickly clean a current workspace of unused


objects.

Instructions: By the User simply picking this function the system responds by
clearing the current workspace, that is the display, of all objects
that are not needed. The objects that are retained depend on the
application and hence this function is intended for use with the
system in the primary Drafting mode.

Options: There are no options within this process.

Result: Unused objects are removed from the graphic workspace and
the associated drawing files.

GLOBAL TRANSACTIONS

Purpose: View transactions in a global project.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Global Transactions. This will display a
dialog showing global transactions.

Options: None.

Result: The dialog is displayed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:145 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

MESSAGE CONFIRM

Purpose: To set the level of user experience regarding confirmation of


system messages. There are three types of messages displayed
to the user:
• Never confirmed
• User-controlled confirmation
• Always confirmed
Messages that should not be confirmed are displayed in the
message window, while messages to confirm are displayed in a
message dialog.
Messages with user-controlled confirmation are handled in this
function. There are three alternatives:
• Avoid confirmation
• Let system decide
• Prefer confirmation

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Message Confirm.


A multiple choice dialog is displayed, with the following
alternatives:
• Avoid
• Default
• Prefer

Options: None.

Result: The level for user-controlled message confirmation is set.

CLAIM LISTS

Purpose: To show the Multiwrite Claims List window, which allows the user
to view claimed database elements, and also claim and unclaim
database elements.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Claim Lists…

Options: None.

Result: The Multiwrite Claims List window is displayed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:146 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LISTS

Purpose: Handle Lists and Collections.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Lists.

Options: None.

Result: The List-Collections dialog will be shown.

DB LISTING

Purpose: To show the Database Listing window, which allows the user to
create a macro that fully describes an element and all of its
offspring and which can be re-input at a later stage.
This window is the same as that called by the option
Tools>Inquiry >DB Changes… as described earlier.
The window functions for both options through the Control
menu.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click DB Listing…

Options: None.

Result: The Database Listing window is displayed.

SETTINGS

EXPLORER

Purpose: To allow the user to define some settings for Explorers.

Instructions: In the Tools menu click Settings then Explorer….

Options: None.

Result: The behaviour of the Explorers will change according to the


settings.

RESET WINDOW LAYOUT

Purpose: To reset the window layout. This should be used when any
window has been placed in an unwanted position and it is
impossible to move it.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Reset WindowsLayout.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:147 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: The window layout will be reset to the default layout.

PREFERENCES

Purpose: To control some settings that are modal, i.e. valid independently
of what drawing is current, such as colours and model draw
codes.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Preferences.


A tree property sheet will appear, containing the categories
• Colours
• Miscellaneous
• Model Draw Code
Just navigate in the tree structure to show and possibly modify
desired properties.
The Model Draw Code is used to control how to present models
of a specific type in the current drawing, e.g. when invoking the
Insert Model function. Note that the draw codes are part of the
Drafting default file.
In order to get also non-graphical information in a panel possible
to pick, graphical handles can be turned on or off by checking the
appropriate check box. These panel components are Weld,
Excess, Notch, Tap, Point, Cutout, Seam, Compensation and
Boundary.

Options: None.

Result: Modal preferences will be modified according to user's action.

DIMENSION

Purpose: To enable a User to create and layout the comprehensive


dimensioning that is required in a two-dimensional drawing.

Instructions: The User can select any one of the available sub-functions within
this group in order to create and add the types of dimensioning
that are available within that sub-function. More than one sub-
function may be employed in order to create the full
dimensioning details that are needed on an individual drawing
and the sequence of usage of the sub-functions, and of the
optional capabilities within them, is at the discretion of the User.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:148 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: The only options are to select the required sub-function from
within the menu that is presented at the top of the screen.
Dimensioning in 2D offers the following functions:
• Linear
• Radius
• Diameter
• Angle
• Curve length
• Area
• Distance 2 point
Dimensioning in 3D offers the following functions:
• Linear
• Axis Parallel
• Coordinate
• Curve Length
• Weight and COG
• Shell Profile Mounting Angle
• Distance To Plane

Result: Complete dimensioning can be added to the graphic display and


in the associated drawing file, and with the system automatically
extracting the required numeric dimensions from the actual
geometry of the stored graphic items.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:149 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LINEAR

Purpose: This function calculates the distances between a number of user-


given 2D points in the drawing, along a given projection direction,
and generates the complete Dimensioning component
automatically.

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click Linear.


The user is requested to give a sequence of measure points,
completed by Operation Complete. Note that the points may be
given in any order, they will eventually be sorted along the
projection direction.
The resulting dimensioning component is then dragged into
desired position in the drawing. Here, it is possible to change the
dimensioning parameters (text height etc) by clicking Options
and thus entering the Advanced function, see below.
Once positioned, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.
Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before first
measure point is given.

1. Direction
The Direction group shows the direction of the dimensioning: all
measure points will be projected along this direction.
If Parallel direction is selected, the user is requested to indicate
a line that defines the direction. Here, Operation Complete
means that the direction will be derived implicit from the two first
measure points given.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:150 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

2. Type
The Type group shows the type of the resulting dimensioning:
Normal means that distances between each two adjacent
measure points are presented.
Chain means that distances from the base point to each other
measure point are presented on a common dimension line. The
base point is one the two end-most points when sorted,
depending on the two first points given related to the stipulated
direction.
Staircase presents the same distances as Chain but each one
on a separate dimension line.

3. Tolerance
The Tolerance group shows the tolerance that will be appended
to the resulting dimension text.
None means no tolerance will be appended
± means symmetric tolerance. The value is typed in the field
below.
+/- means unsymmetrical tolerance. The Max and Min values
are typed in the two fields below.

4. Include
The Include group shows what should be included in the
resulting dimension text:
Value - the measured distance
Ø - a diameter symbol to prepend
Ref Lines - leaders, aiming at the measure points

5. Text and Arrow Layout


Four different layouts for single-measure dimensionings of type
Normal are possible:
• Text inside, both arrows inside
• Text inside, both arrows flipped
• Text outside, one arrow flipped
• Text outside, both arrows flipped

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:151 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

6. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured distance is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured distance
~D
Diameter symbol
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
~+<max value>/<min value>
Unsymmetrical tolerance
#/
New-line separator
The field is normally not edited by user. However, arbitrary text
may be inserted at any position in between the intelligent
markers.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:152 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

7. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured distance.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the ends of dimension lines.
• Height of dimension text.
• Various tolerances controlling the layout of resulting
dimensioning, like
• Distance text-line
• Reference line gap
• Reference line excess
• Chain gap
• Staircase factor
• Fit control for dimension text in restricted spaces.
• Shrink
• Rotate
• No adjust
• Position of the dimension text.
Alternatives for normal dimensionings:
• Above dimension line
• Splitting the dimension line
• Above the dimension line, but rotated
Alternatives for chained dimensionings:
• Centered
• At arrow
• At arrow, rotated
• At reference line, rotated

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component is added to the drawing.


The User has full control in order to ensure a suitable and clear
layout that is consistent with the requirements and the
complexity of the overall arrangement.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:153 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

RADIUS

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:154 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Purpose: This function calculates the radius of a user-indicated arc or


circle entity in the drawing, and generates the complete
Dimensioning component automatically.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:155 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click Radius.


The user is requested to define the arc or circle from which to
create the radius dimensioning. Initially the system asks for an
existing arc, but any arc definition mode can be selected from the
Geometry Arc definition toolbar.
If the type is Knuckled or Cross, the position of the leader must
also be given.
Once created, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.
Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before the
arc/circle is given.

1. Type
There are three styles available:
• Straight
• Knuckled
• Cross
The straight style need only the arc/circle indication. The radius
is presented on a leader line aiming at the arc edge.
The knuckled style consists of a two-segment leader, with the
radius presented on a horizontal line. Here another user-given
point is required to locate the horizontal part of the leader.
The cross style presents the radius on a leader line from the
centre of the arc/circle to a point on the arc/circle edge. Here the
edge point is indicated by the user. Note that there are four
different layouts for the cross style, see the Text and Arrow
Layout section below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:156 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

2. Tolerance
The Tolerance group shows the tolerance that will be appended
to the resulting dimension text.
None means no tolerance will be appended
± means symmetric tolerance. The value is typed in the field
below.
+/- means unsymmetrical tolerance. The Max and Min values
are typed in the two fields below.

3. Include
The Include group shows what should be included in the
resulting dimension text:
Value - the measured radius.

4. Text and Arrow Layout


Four different layouts for cross radius dimensionings are
possible:
• Text inside, both arrows inside
• Text inside, both arrows flipped
• Text outside, one arrow flipped
• Text outside, both arrows flipped

5. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured radius prepended by 'R' is
presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured radius
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
~+<max value>/<min value>
Unsymmetrical tolerance
#/
New-line separator

Note: The field is normally not edited by user. However,


arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:157 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

6. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured radius.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the end of leader lines.
• Height of dimension text.
• Distance between measure text and leader line.

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component, containing the leader and


the measured radius, is added to the drawing.

DIAMETER

Purpose: This function calculates the diameter of a user-indicated arc or


circle entity in the drawing, and generates the complete
Dimensioning component automatically.

Instructions: In the Dimension menu, click Diameter.


The user is requested to indicate the arc or circle from which to
create the diameter dimensioning. If the type is Knuckled or
Cross, the position of the leader must also be given.
Once created, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.
Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters are displayed. Changes here can be done before the
arc/circle is given.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:158 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Type
There are three styles available:
• Straight
• Knuckled
• Cross
The straight style need only the arc/circle indication. The
diameter is presented on a leader line aiming at the arc edge.
The knuckled style consists of a two-segment leader, with the
diameter presented on a horizontal line. Here another user-given
point is required to locate the horizontal part of the leader.
The cross style presents the diameter on a leader line from the
centre of the arc/circle to a point on the arc/circle edge. Here the
edge point is indicated by the user. Note that there are four
different layouts for the cross style, see the Text and Arrow
Layout section below

2. Tolerance
The Tolerance group shows the tolerance that will be appended
to the resulting dimension text.
None means no tolerance will be appended
± means symmetric tolerance. The value is typed in the field
below.
+/- means unsymmetrical tolerance. The Max and Min values
are typed in the two fields below.

3. Include
The Include group shows what should be included in the
resulting dimension text:
Value - the measured diameter
Ø - a diameter symbol to prepend

4. Text and Arrow Layout


Four different layouts for cross diameter dimensionings are
possible:
• Text inside, both arrows inside
• Text inside, both arrows flipped
• Text outside, one arrow flipped
• Text outside, both arrows flipped

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:159 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

5. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured diameter prepended by the
diameter symbol is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured diameter
~D
Diameter symbol
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
~+<max value>/<min value>
Unsymmetrical tolerance
#/
New-line separator

Note: The field is normally not edited by user. However,


arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

6. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured diameter.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the end of leader lines.
• Height of dimension text.
• Distance between measure text and leader line.

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component, containing the leader and


the measured diameter, is added to the drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:160 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

ANGLE

Purpose: This function is used to calculate the angle between two lines in
the current drawing and generates the complete dimensioning
component automatically.

Instructions: In the Dimension menu, click Angle.


The user is requested to define the two leg lines used to create
the angle dimensioning.
Next, the user is requested to indicate the desired sector (there
are four possibilities) the angle shall be measured in, and at the
same time the point through which the dimension arc should
pass.
Finally, user positions the text denoting the measured angle. By
clicking Options here, the text attributes like height, font, aspect
etc can be changed. Note that the change of text height will be
modal while change of other attributes only will apply on this
dimensioning. Changing text attributes other than the height
permanently is done by updating the corresponding default
keywords via Format>Defaults. If the text is placed outside the
sector (and the smallest angle is presented, see below) the
arrows will flip 180 degrees and the dimension arc will be
somewhat extended (useful when sectors are narrow).
Reference lines are created automatically if necessary (e.g.
when the dimension arc does not meet one (or both) of the given
leg lines).
Once created, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.
Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before the
first leg line is given.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:161 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Text Orientation
The Text Orientation group shows the orientation of the
dimension text:
• Horizontal
• Vertical
• Tangential
If Tangential orientation is selected, the text will be rotated to
align with the dimension arc at the point on this arc closest to the
text when positioned. Initially, the text is aligned to the middle of
the dimension arc.

2. Tolerance
The Tolerance group shows the tolerance that will be appended
to the resulting dimension text.
None means no tolerance will be appended
± means symmetric tolerance. The value is typed in the field
below.
+/- means unsymmetrical tolerance. The Max and Min values
are typed in the two fields below.

3. Include
The Include group shows what should be included in the
resulting dimension text:
Value - the measured angle
Unit - the unit of the angle (degree symbol)

4. Range
Given the two leg lines, two different angles can be presented:
• Smallest - the indicated sector will be measured (up to 180
degrees)
• Biggest - the indicated plus the two adjacent sectors will be
measured (up to 360 degrees)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:162 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

5. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured angle plus unit is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured angle
~0
Unit symbol (degree)
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
~+<max value>/<min value>
Unsymmetrical tolerance
#/
New-line separator

Note: The field is normally not edited by user. However,


arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

6. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button it is possible to view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured angle.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the ends of dimension arc.
• Height of dimension text.
• Reference line gap and excess (when created)

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component, containing the dimension


arc, the measure text and the reference lines are added to the
drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:163 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CURVED

Purpose: This function calculates the length of a 2D curve (a contour or


part of it) in the current drawing and generates the complete
Dimensioning component automatically.

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click Curved.


First, the contour to measure is indicated.
Next, the user is prompted to supply an arbitrary number (at least
two) of restricting points on the contour. These points are used to
divide the contour in subparts. Each such subpart will then be
measured. The definition of restricting points is completed by
clicking Operation Complete. Note that the points may be given
in any order, they will eventually be sorted along the curve. If no
restriction points are defined, the ends of the contour are used as
restriction points and the whole contour will then be measured.
Next, the resulting dimension line (a copy of the measured curve)
is dragged into desired location by the User. Click Operation
Complete at this stage to skip the dimension and witness lines.
Finally, if Text Adjust (see below) has been ordered, the User has
the possibility to indicate and transform any of the resulting
submeasure texts. Complete with Operation Complete.
Once created, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.
Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before the
contour is indicated.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:164 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Type
The Type group shows the type of the resulting dimensioning:
Normal means that lengths of each curve subpart are presented.
Chain means that distances (along the curve) from the base
point to each other curve restricting point are presented on a
common dimension line. The base point is one the two end-most
restricting points on the curve, depending on the order of two first
restricting points given.
Staircase presents the same distances as Chain but each one
on a separate dimension line.

2. Tolerance
The Tolerance group shows the tolerance that will be appended
to the resulting dimension text.
None means no tolerance will be appended
± means symmetric tolerance. The value is typed in the field
below.
+/- means unsymmetrical tolerance. The Max and Min values
are typed in the two fields below.

3. Include
The Include group shows what should be included in the
resulting dimension text:
Value - the measured distances
Ref Lines - leaders, aiming at the restriction points on the curve

4. Text and Arrow Layout


Four different layouts for single-measure dimensionings of type
Normal are possible:
• Text inside, both arrows inside
• Text inside, both arrows flipped
• Text outside, one arrow flipped
• Text outside, both arrows flipped

5. Text Adjust
If Text Adjust is on, it will be possible to identify and adjust any of
the resulting submeasure texts, using the general 2D
transformation tool.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:165 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

6. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured distance is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured distance
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
~+<max value>/<min value>
Unsymmetrical tolerance
#/
New-line separator

Note: The field is normally not edited by user. However,


arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:166 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

7. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured distance.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the ends of dimension lines.
• Height of dimension text.
• Various tolerances controlling the layout of resulting
dimensioning, like
• Distance text-line
• Reference line gap
• Reference line excess
• Chain gap
• Staircase factor
• Fit control for dimension text in restricted spaces.
• Shrink
• Rotate
• No adjust
• Position of the dimension text.
Alternatives for normal dimensionings:
• Above dimension line
• Splitting the dimension line
• Above the dimension line, but rotated
Alternatives for chained dimensionings:
• Centered
• At arrow
• At arrow, rotated
• At reference line, rotated

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component, containing the dimension


line, the measure text and the reference lines are added to the
drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:167 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

AREA

Purpose: This function calculates the area of a user-defined closed


contour in the drawing, and generates the complete
Dimensioning component automatically.

Instructions: In the Dimension menu, click Area


The closed contour is defined by indicating one or a number of
contours that together define the shape on which to apply the
area calculation. Complete the shape definition by Operation
Complete. A non-closed shape will automatically be closed by a
straight line.
The resulting dimension text is dragged into desired position in
the drawing. At this stage the height and rotation of the
dimension text can be changed by clicking Options. The unit in
which the area is presented is controlled by the default keyword
UNIT_AREA_FAC.
Once created, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.

Options: None.

Result: Text stating the bounded area can be placed close to any entity
in a display and stored in the associated drawing file.

DISTANCE

Purpose: This function calculates the straight line distance between two
given points in the current drawing and generates the complete
Dimensioning component automatically.

Instructions: In the Dimension menu, click Distance.


The two points are supplied by the user.
Next, the text denoting the measured straight length is positioned
by user. By clicking Options here, some text attributes (height
and rotation) can be changed.
Once created, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component, containing the measure


text is added to the drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:168 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

3D

LINEAR

Purpose: This function presents the distances between a number of


successive 3D points in an arbitrary view and generates the
complete Dimensioning component automatically. The measures
are calculated along the direction parallel to a line passing
through the first two 3D points given (all given 3d points are
projected on this line before distances are calculated).

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Linear.


The user is requested to give a sequence of 3D points in an
arbitrary view, completed by Operation Complete. Note that the
points may be given in any order, they will eventually be sorted
along the projection direction (a line passing through the first two
3D points given).
The resulting dimensioning component is then dragged into
desired position in the drawing. Here, it is possible to change the
dimensioning parameters (text height etc) by clicking Options
and thus entering the Advanced function, see below.
Once positioned, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.
Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before first
measure point is given.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:169 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Tolerance
The Tolerance group shows the tolerance that will be appended
to the resulting dimension text.
None means no tolerance will be appended
± means symmetric tolerance. The value is typed in the field
below.
+/- means unsymmetrical tolerance. The Max and Min values
are typed in the two fields below.

2. Include
The Include group shows what should be included in the
resulting dimension text:
Value - the measured distance
Ø - a diameter symbol to prepend
Ref Lines - leaders, aiming at the measure points

3. Text and Arrow Layout


Four different layouts for single-measure dimensionings are
possible:
• Text inside, both arrows inside
• Text inside, both arrows flipped
• Text outside, one arrow flipped
• Text outside, both arrows flipped

4. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured distance is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured distance
~D
Diameter symbol
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
~+<max value>/<min value>
Unsymmetrical tolerance
#/
New-line separator

Note: The field is normally not edited by user. However,


arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:170 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

5. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured distance.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the ends of dimension lines.
• Height of dimension text.
• Various tolerances controlling the layout of resulting
dimensioning, like
• Distance text-line
• Reference line gap
• Reference line excess
• Fit control for dimension text in restricted spaces.
• Shrink
• Rotate
• No adjust
• Position of the dimension text.
• Above dimension line
• Splitting the dimension line
• Above the dimension line, but rotated

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component is added to the drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:171 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

AXIS PARALLEL

Purpose: This function calculates the distances between two 3D points,


along each cardinal axis and generates the complete
dimensioning component automatically.

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Axis Parallel.


Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed.
Changes here can be done before first 3D point is given.
The user is requested to define two 3D points in an arbitrary
view. Using these points it is possible to create up to three
(depending on the view) linear measures, each along one of the
cardinal axes.
Next, the user is requested to locate the dimension line in the
currently proposed direction. A dialog controlling what direction
to measure along, together with direction and base of witness
lines, is displayed. The user may change these controls if
desired. Once positioned, the system repeats this request for the
two remaining measure directions. Note that the system will skip
measure directions perpendicular to the selected view, and also
measure directions yielding a zero distance.
During location of the dimension line, it is possible to change the
dimensioning parameters (text height etc) by clicking Options
and thus entering the Advanced function, see below.
Once all possible (and wanted) dimensions have been
positioned, the user is requested to start all over by giving two
new 3D points or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:172 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Tolerance
The Tolerance group shows the tolerance that will be appended
to the resulting dimension text.
None means no tolerance will be appended
± means symmetric tolerance. The value is typed in the field
below.
+/- means unsymmetrical tolerance. The Max and Min values
are typed in the two fields below.

2. Include
The Include group shows what should be included in the
resulting dimension text:
Value - the measured distance
Ø - a diameter symbol to prepend
Ref Lines - leaders, aiming at the measure points

3. Text and Arrow Layout


Four different layouts are possible:
• Text inside, both arrows inside
• Text inside, both arrows flipped
• Text outside, one arrow flipped
• Text outside, both arrows flipped

4. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured distance is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured distance
~D
Diameter symbol
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
~+<max value>/<min value>
Unsymmetrical tolerance
#/
New-line separator

Note: The field is normally not edited by user. However,


arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:173 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

5. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured distance.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the ends of dimension lines.
• Height of dimension text.
• Various tolerances controlling the layout of resulting
dimensioning, like
• Distance text-line
• Reference line gap
• Reference line excess
• Fit control for dimension text in restricted spaces.
• Shrink
• Rotate
• No adjust
• Position of the dimension text.
• Above dimension line
• Splitting the dimension line
• Above the dimension line, but rotated

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:174 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Measure Along
Shows along which cardinal direction the current dimensioning
will be measured. Note that the system will accept neither a
direction perpendicular to the selected view, nor a direction
yielding a zero distance.

2. Witness Along
Shows along which cardinal direction the witness lines will be
presented. For each measure along direction, there are two
possible witness line directions.

3. Witness Base
Shows the base point for the witness lines. One of the witness
lines will aim directly at the selected base point while the other
will aim at projection of the non-base point.

4. Add Help Ref Lines


If checked, additional reference lines will be drawn from the non-
base point along one or two cardinal axes to meet its
corresponding witness line.

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component is added to the drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:175 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

COORDINATE

Purpose: This function retrieves the x-, y- and z- components of a 3D point


in the current drawing and generates the complete Dimensioning
component automatically.

Instructions: In the Dimension menu, click 3D, then Coordinate.


The user is requested to give the 3D Point to present. The
dimensioning will by default be presented in the model view
derived from 3D point definition (e.g. if the 3D point is defined as
an event point, the model view in which the point is indicated is
chosen). The resulting dimensioning component is then dragged
into desired position in the drawing. The action when clicking
Options here depends on the number of model views in the
drawing: If there only is one view, the user can change text
properties and rotation directly. If there is more than one model
view the user can change the default view in which the
dimensioning will be presented by indicating that model view.
Another click on Options here lets the user change text
properties and rotation.
Once positioned, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.
Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before the
3D point is given.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:176 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Dimension Text
These three fields control, for each axis, the format of the
resulting dimension text. Each one is built up by intelligent
markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the specific field is
reset to system default (the coordinate value prefixed by
<X|Y|Z>= is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The value of the coordinate

Note: The fields is normally not edited by user. However,


arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

2. Translation
These check buttons control, for each axis, if the coordinate
should be translated using GENTAB (references to frames and
longitudinal positions) or not. Initial check status is fetched from
the default keywords DIM_COORD<X|Y|Z>_TRANSLATION.

3. Additional Text
Optionally, a line of Additional Text may be included in the
resulting dimension text, below the coordinate values. The
Include check button controls this.

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component, containing the dimension


text inside a box and a reference line to the measured point in
the model view, is added to the drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:177 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CURVE LENGTH

Purpose: This function calculates the length of a 3D curve (curved panel/


plate boundary) in the current drawing and generates the
complete Dimensioning component automatically.

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Curve Length.


The User must select curved panel/plate boundary in the model
view and locate the dimension line moving with the cursor. When
the location of the dimension line is chosen, click to position.
Second click defines location of the measure text.
Before defining the dimension line location, Options can select
two event points belonging to the selected plate boundary.
Before defining the measure text location, Options can change
height and rotation of the text.

Options: None

Result: A complete dimensioning component, containing the measure


text and a reference line to the measured boundary, is added to
the drawing.

WEIGHT AND COG

Purpose: This function calculates the weight and centre of gravity for a
collection of models and generates the complete dimensioning
component automatically.

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Weight and COG.


The models to participate in the calculation are collected in
interaction with the User. In conjunction with the first indication,
the user must choose the desired level of collecting, i.e. whether
only the indicated or all models in the view should be collected.
This level will be modal in subsequent indications. Click Option
to return to level selection. The collection is completed by
Operation Complete.
To remove a previously created dimensioning, click
Edit>Delete>Last Entity.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:178 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component, containing the measure


text inside a box and a reference line to the measured point
(COG) are added to the drawing.

Important: The Weight and COG dimension is based on models


collected from the drawing (and not from primary
source in Dabacon PADD view). In case models are
collected on view level, there is a potential risk that
not all models are included. This could be the case if
the view initially has been created with Global or
Universal Hidden Line, or if the drawing has been
created in releases before 12.0 SP6.15. A warning
will be issued in this case. To avoid this warning,
please change the view properties to Wireline and
do an Update Design before calculating the WCOG.
If You still get a warning it is recommended to create
a new view if you want to use the Weight and COG
dimension.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:179 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SHELL PROFILE MOUNTING ANGLE

Purpose: This function is used to guide the mounting angle of shell profile
webs, crossing the seam between two adjacent sections, during
the assembly phase. The function calculates this 'mounting'
angle between a shell profile web and a section seam, in the
seam plane, and generates the complete dimensioning
component automatically.
As described above, only seams defined as the intersection
between the surface and a plane can be used.
The side of the shell profile web to calculate the angle is
controlled by the Drafting default keyword
DIM_ANG_SHELL_PROF_SIDE.
The length of the seam leg, i.e. the leg simulating the seam side
is controlled by the Drafting default keyword
DIM_ANG_SHELL_PROF.LEG..
Instructions: In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Shell Profile Mounting
Angle.
The user indicates the section seam/shell curve and shell profile.
Once indicated, the seam/curve will be valid until this function is
left, or the user rejects the indication of a shell profile. Using the
seam/curve indication, the view to present the dimensioning in,
will be defined. The section seam/shell curve and the shell profile
will together define the angle vertex and the two angle legs. The
shell profile leg is defined as the intersection between the plane
of the section seam and the shell profile web. The vertex is
defined as the intersection between the section seam and the
mould line of the profile.
The dimension arc will be presented in the view defined by the
shell profile indication and is located by a user-defined point
through which the dimension arc should pass, Once the
dimension arc is located, the User drags the text denoting the
measured angle into desired location. By clicking Options here,
the text attributes like height, font, aspect etc can be changed.
Note that the change of text height will be modal while change of
other attributes only will apply on this dimensioning. Changing
text attributes other than the height permanently is done by
updating the corresponding default keywords via
Format>Defaults. If the text is placed outside the sector (and
the smallest angle is presented, see below) the arrows will flip
180 degrees and the dimension arc will be somewhat extended
(useful when sectors are narrow).
Once created, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.
Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before the
section seam/shell curve is given.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:180 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Text Orientation
The Text Orientation group shows the orientation of the
dimension text:
• Horizontal
• Vertical
• Tangential
If Tangential orientation is selected, the text will be rotated to
align with the dimension arc at the point on this arc closest to the
text when positioned. Initially, the text is aligned to the middle of
the dimension arc.

2. Tolerance
The Tolerance group shows the tolerance that will be appended
to the resulting dimension text.
None means no tolerance will be appended
± means symmetric tolerance. The value is typed in the field
below.
+/- means unsymmetrical tolerance. The Max and Min values
are typed in the two fields below.

3. Include
The Include group shows what should be included in the
resulting dimension text:
Value - the measured angle
Unit - the unit of the angle (degree symbol)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:181 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

4. Range
Given the two leg lines, two different angles can be presented:
• Smallest - the indicated sector will be measured (up to 180
degrees)
• Biggest - the indicated plus the two adjacent sectors will be
measured (up to 360 degrees)

5. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured angle plus unit is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured angle
~0
Unit symbol (degree)
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
~+<max value>/<min value>
Unsymmetrical tolerance
#/
New-line separator

Note: The field is normally not edited by user. However,


arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

6. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured angle.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the ends of dimension arc.
• Height of dimension text.
• Reference line gap and excess.

Options: None.

Result: A complete dimensioning component, containing the dimension


arc, the measure text and the reference lines are added to the
drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:182 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Purpose: This function calculates the distance from an arbitrary point to a


principal plane, i.e. a plane perpendicular to any of the cardinal
axis. Special cases of such principal plane are the base line,
centre line or aft perpendicular plane, where the 'depth' of the
plane is implicitly predefined.

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Distance to plane and


Leader.
First, the user selects the Principal Plane from a simple dialog
with the following alternatives:
• YZ plane through a given x-coordinate
• XZ plane through a given y-coordinate
• XY plane through a given z-coordinate
• Base line plane - BL
• Centre line plane - CL
• Aft perpendicular plane - APP
In the general case, the coordinate defining the depth of the
plane is required. The depth is then supplied from keyboard.
Clicking Options here, the depth can be indicated in the
drawing.
Next, the point to measure the distance from is given, in a view
perpendicular to the principle plane. This means that it is enough
to define a 2D point in such a view. During the definition of the 2D
point, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed, see below. Changes here can be done
before the 2D point is given.
Finally, the resulting dimensioning is located in the view. Here, it
is possible to change the dimensioning parameters (text height
etc) by clicking Options and thus entering the Advanced
function, see below.
The dimensioning consists of the measured distance along a
dimension line denoting the direction of the measure (parallel to
the normal of the principle plane) plus a reference line denoting
the 2D point. The user is now requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To select another principal
plane, click Cancel. To remove the last created dimensioning,
click Edit/Delete Last Entity.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:183 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants. By
clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured distance is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured distance
#/
New-line separator

Note: The fields are normally not edited by the user. However,
arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

2. Plane Reference Text


Optionally, a string denoting the principal plane may be included
in the resulting dimension text, appended to the measured
distance. The Include check button controls this. For BL, CL
and APP these Plane Reference Texts are part of the Drafting
Default Keywords.

3. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured distance.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the end of the dimension line.
• Height of dimension text.
• Various tolerances controlling the layout of resulting
dimensioning, like
• Distance text-line
• Reference line gap
• Reference line excess

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:184 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: The distance to chosen principal plane is presented in the model


view as is defined by the User.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:185 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

DISTANCE TO RSO

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:186 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:187 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Purpose: This function calculates the distance from a selected model to


the closest RSO along one of X-, Y- or Z-axis. It also creates a
dimensioning component to display the resulting value. The
function will measure from the point on the model given by the
POS attribute. If no RSO is found you will get the measure to the
closest frame or LP-plane. (The RSO does not have to be in the
drawing, the system will search in the database).
Note that some activities need to be completed to make this
work as expected. The RSDIM attribute of the RSOs needs to
be set so that it is possible to measure to. Also, the Ship
Coordinate Option must be activated using the command
SHIPCO ON in the Command Window. For more information
refer to User Guide Marine Customisation / Customising
Presentation of Ship Coordinates.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:188 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Instructions: In the Dimension menu, click 3D, then Distance to RSO.


Initially the Distance to RSO dialog is shown. Here you can
select along which axis you want to measure (X, Y or Z):

The dimension text can be customised by clicking one of the


Format radio buttons.
Now select which model to measure from. The distance will be
from the POS attribute of this model.
Finally place the dimension in the drawing. The placement of the
dimension text will either be on the same or on the opposite side
of the arrow. This depends on which side of the model (or more
specific on which side of the point given by the POS attribute) is
indicated.
In case the distance should be represented in a box like a label
and not as a dimension, this is easily achieved with the function
Annotate Label. Use the attributes “SHIPX”, “SHIPY” and
“SHIPZ” for the distance along the X-, Y- and Z-axis respectively.

Options: None

Result: A new dimension component is created that will show the


distance to the closest RSO.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:189 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

DISTANCE TO PLANE

LEADER

Purpose: This function calculates the distance from an arbitrary point to a


principal plane, i.e. a plane perpendicular to any of the cardinal
axis. Special cases of such principal plane are the base line,
centre line or aft perpendicular plane, where the 'depth' of the
plane is implicitly predefined.

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Distance to plane and


Leader.
First, the user selects the Principal Plane from a simple dialog
with the following alternatives:
• YZ plane through a given x-coordinate
• XZ plane through a given y-coordinate
• XY plane through a given z-coordinate
• Base line plane - BL
• Centre line plane - CL
• Aft perpendicular plane - APP
In the general case, the coordinate defining the depth of the
plane is required. The depth is then supplied from keyboard.
Clicking Options here, the depth can be indicated in the
drawing.
Next, the point to measure the distance from is given, in a view
perpendicular to the principle plane. This means that it is enough
to define a 2D point in such a view. During the definition of the 2D
point, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed, see below. Changes here can be done
before the 2D point is given.
Finally, the resulting dimensioning is located in the view. Here, it
is possible to change the dimensioning parameters (text height
etc) by clicking Options and thus entering the Advanced
function, see below.
The dimensioning consists of the measured distance along a
dimension line denoting the direction of the measure (parallel to
the normal of the principle plane) plus a reference line denoting
the 2D point. The user is now requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To select another principal
plane, click Cancel. To remove the last created dimensioning,
click Edit/Delete Last Entity.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:190 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants. By
clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured distance is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured distance
#/
New-line separator

Note: The fields are normally not edited by the user. However,
arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

2. Plane Reference Text


Optionally, a string denoting the principal plane may be included
in the resulting dimension text, appended to the measured
distance. The Include check button controls this. For BL, CL
and APP these Plane Reference Texts are part of the Drafting
Default Keywords.

3. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured distance.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the end of the dimension line.
• Height of dimension text.
• Various tolerances controlling the layout of resulting
dimensioning, like
• Distance text-line
• Reference line gap
• Reference line excess

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:191 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: The distance to chosen principal plane is presented in the model


view as is defined by the User.

BOX

Purpose: This function calculates the distance from an arbitrary point to a


principal plane, i.e. a plane perpendicular to any of the cardinal
axis. Special cases of such a principal plane are the base line,
centre line or aft perpendicular plane, where the 'depth' of the
plane is implicitly predefined.

Instructions: In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Distance to plane and Box.
First, the user selects the Principal Plane from a simple dialog
with the following alternatives:
• YZ plane through a given x-coordinate
• XZ plane through a given y-coordinate
• XY plane through a given z-coordinate
• Base line plane - BL
• Centre line plane - CL
• Aft perpendicular plane - APP
In the general case, the coordinate defining the depth of the
plane is required. The depth is then supplied from keyboard.
Clicking Options here, the depth can be indicated in the
drawing.
Next, the 3D point to measure the distance from is defined by
user in any model view. During the definition of the 3D point, a
dialog showing current dimension controls and parameters is
displayed, see below. Changes here can be done before the 3D
point is given.
Finally, the resulting dimensioning is dragged into desired
position in the drawing. Here, it is possible to change the
dimensioning parameters (text properties and rotation) by
clicking Options.
The dimensioning consists of the measured distance inside a
box with a leader referring to the 3D point. The user is now
requested to create another dimensioning or quit the function. To
select another principal plane, click Cancel. To remove the last
created dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:192 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

1. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants. By
clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (the measured distance prefixed by "H=" is
presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured distance
#/
New-line separator
The fields is normally not edited by user. However, arbitrary text
may be inserted at any position in between the intelligent
markers.

2. Plane Reference Text


Optionally, a string denoting the principal plane may be included
in the resulting dimension text, appended to the measured
distance. The Include check button controls this. For BL, CL
and APP these Plane Reference Texts are part of the Drafting
Default Keywords.

3. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
• Number of decimal positions in the measured distance.
• Type and size of arrowhead at the end of the dimension line.
• Height of dimension text.

Options: None.

Result: The distance to chosen principal plane is presented in the model


view as defined by the User.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:193 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

ANNOTATE

Purpose: To enable the User to add various notes in the current drawing.

Instructions: Click any type of notes in the Annotate menu to add note in the
drawing.

Options: None.

Result: Chosen note is added to the drawing as is defined by the User.

GENERAL NOTE

Purpose: To directly annotate components within a drawing.

Instructions: In Annotate menu, click General Note.


The first step is defining of text. There are two cases. If the text
exists, it can be selected on the screen. If not, the User has to
click Operation complete and then key in new text. After OK the
system message is: 'Start of reference line: Indicate contour or
symbol'. When the reference line is defined, the function can be
finished by Operation complete. The system will align the note
with the last element of the reference line.

Options: Some additional operations can be performed in this function by


Options.
Click Options immediately after invoking the function. The
system presents the next operations:
1. Suppress Note symbol - hides Note symbol
2. Change Note symbol - can be chosen from list of symbols
17. Change reference symbol - can be chosen from list of
symbols
4. Fetch Model information - After indicating of model
component the desired type of model information can be
selected from list.
5. Fetch Name - After indicating of model component the system
fetches the name of the model component.

Result: An annotation note can be suitable positioned and connected via


a reference line to a geometric entity in the display and in the
drawing file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:194 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

POSITION NUMBER

Purpose: To enable a User to add position numbers, to represent, for


example, component numbers within an assembly, to geometric
components in drawings.

Instructions: In the Dimension menu, click Position Number.


The process has five basic steps, namely to select a suitable
'position number' symbol, to select a suitable reference symbol,
to position the reference symbol on or over the geometric entity,
input the component number/text, and then to position the
attachment line. This sequence of selection and input must be
followed.
The system displays a multiple choice dialog box. If the default
position number symbol, that is a simple circle, is not suitable
then select option 2 in the dialog box. This opens a simple
'graphic' dialog box containing 8 alternative symbols and from
which the User can cursor select the required one and then click
the OK button, returning the display back to the 'multiple choice'
dialog box.
If the default reference symbol is not suitable then select option 3
in the dialog box. This opens a simple graphic dialog box
containing 7 alternative symbols and from which the User can
cursor select the required one and then click the OK button,
returning the display back to the multiple choice dialog box.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:195 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Select option 0 and then the Operation Complete icon. This


opens a dialog box in which the User can enter a simple text
string that is the component position number and when complete
this is to be followed by clicking the OK button. The display then
returns to the geometry.
Position the cursor on or close to the relevant geometric entity, at
an appropriate location, and click the Left-hand button once.
This establishes the location of the 'reference' symbol. Move the
cursor to a required point on the screen, using the temporarily
displayed attachment line for reference, and again click the left-
hand button. The cursor can be moved to a second or even third
location, using the temporarily displayed reference line for
guidance and again clicking the button at each locating point.
This establishes the location of the position number symbol.
Then cursor select the 'operation complete 'icon.
The system will then reopen the dialog in which a new position
number can be input, assuming that the same reference and
'position number' symbols are still valid. If there is no
requirement for another position number annotation simply click
OK, otherwise repeat the above actions. Then cursor select the
'operation complete' icon followed by the Repaint icon.
The position number enclosed in the select symbol will then
appear in the display connected by a line or set of straight lines
to the 'reference symbol.
It is to be noted that the User cannot return to the multiple choice
input dialog in order to change an established position number
annotation, for example to change a number or a symbol. The
User will need to first delete and then redefine the annotation.

Options: There are no other options in addition to those that are described
above.

Result: Position Number annotations, e.g. balloon references, are added


to the display and the drawing file.

CONFIG NOTE

Purpose: To enable the User to add and move configured notes to model
parts in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Annotation menu, click Config note, followed by the


wanted subfunction.

Options: None.

Result: Configured notes are added or moved in the current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:196 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CONFIG SET

Purpose: This function allows the User to configure notes before adding to
the drawing. Here 'configure' means choice of note type
depending on the model part.

Instructions: In the Annotation menu, click Config note, then Config set.
This invokes dialog window Customized Note with list of notes:
• Plate note
• Profile note
• Bracket standard note
• Bracket instance note
• Bracket profile note.
Click the desired item from the list, then OK. The window closes
and you can select component within a model view. When the
system recognizes the component, you can position the note and
add to the drawing by Operation complete.
When the system prompts to indicate component, click
Operation complete. Configurable note window appears.
There are three alternatives:
1. Single item. Single items can be annotated one by one.
2. Automatic in subview. All items in the indicated subview will
be annotated automatically.
18. Automatic in view. All items in the indicated view will be
annotated automatically.
4. Reference line OFF (on). It can be used in combination with
the options Automatic in subview and Automatic in view. When
the user sets the options to Reference line OFF (on). the other 2
options add a note without any reference line. When the user
sets the options to Reference line ON (off), notes with reference
lines will be added to the drawing. The reference lines will
consist of 2 line segments.
The configured notes can be customized through Vitesse scripts.

Options: None.

Result: Configured notes are added to the current drawing.

CONFIG MOVE

Purpose: To move a configured note.

Instructions: Indicate the note to be moved. Move it to desired position.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:197 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: Selecting option when indicating note to be moved gives the


possibility to create a reference line. This is only possible if the
note does not already have a reference line. Indicate the note,
create the reference line by indicating points in drawing and
clicking OC.

Result: The configured note is moved or a reference line is added to a


note.

HULL NOTE

Purpose: To enable the User to add Position number, Assembly, Bevel,


Grinding or Hole Dimension note to hull model parts.

Instructions: In Annotate menu, click Hull Note then one of the following: Pos
No, Assembly, Bevel, Grinding, Hole Dimension to add the
corresponding note.

Options: None.

Result: Chosen notes are added to the selected hull model parts.

POS NO

Purpose: To enable the User to add position numbers to hull parts in the
current drawing.

Instructions: In the Annotate menu, click Hull Note, then Pos No.
In the first dialog window the User has to select hull model part:
1. Profile
2. Bracket
19. Clip
4. Plane plate
5. Intersect plate
6. Doubling plate
The next step indicates the model part that is selected in the
dialog window and positions the reference line on the screen.
Operation Complete finishes the function with presenting the
position number on the screen.
When the User chooses the hull part to annotate, a dialog for
tuning the appearance of the position numbers can be invoked
by Options. Here the User can select in simple table the
information that will be added and symbol for the position
number.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:198 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: Position numbers are added to the selected model parts as


defined by the User.

ASSEMBLY

Purpose: To enable the User to add assembly name to hull parts in the
current drawing.

Instructions: In the Annotate menu, click Hull Note, then Assembly.


In the first dialog window, the User has to select hull model part:
1. Profile
2. Bracket
20. Plane plate
4. Intersect plate
5. Any
The next step is indicating the model part that is selected in the
dialog window and positioning the reference line on the screen.
Operation complete finishes the function with presenting the
name of assembly that the hull model part belongs to.

Options: When the User chooses the hull part to annotate, a dialog for
choosing the assembly level can be invoked by Options.

Result: Notes with assembly names are added to the selected hull model
parts as defined by the User.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:199 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

BEVEL

Purpose: To enable the User to add note with bevel information to the
selected hull model part.

Instructions: In the Annotate menu, click Hull Note, then Bevel.


In the first dialog window, the User has to select edge of hull
model part:
1. Plate edge
2. Profile edge
21. Bracket edge
4. Clip
5. Doubling edge
The next step is indicating the seam and positioning the
reference line on the screen. Operation Complete finishes the
function with presenting bevel note on the screen.

Options: None.

Result: Notes with bevel information are added to the selected hull
model parts.

GRINDING

Purpose: To enable the User to create symbols for grinding hull holes.

Instructions: In the Annotate menu, click Hull note, then Grinding.


If grinding is defined, the system prompts for a hole indication
and placing the grinding symbol. If grinding is not defined, the
system gives message: 'No grinding defined'.
The colour and height of the symbol can be changed through
variables in Drafting default file.

Options: None.

Result: Symbol for grinding is added to the selected hole.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:200 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

HOLE DIMENSION

Purpose: To enable the user to add hole dimensions to holes defined in


Panels. The notes are associative when used in Hull Views and
will be updated when a View is Recreated.

Instructions: A hole is indicated and the corresponding hole designation and


dimension is automatically fetched from the model. Clicking
Operation Complete will add the note inside the hole. Adding a
reference line will add the note on the defined Line.
If placing the note with reference lines, the designation and
dimension will be presented. If placing the note inside the hole
and Hole is of type HO or HE, then only the dimension will be
presented.

Options: The text height is controlled using the Option button. Default text
height is defined using the Drafting default POS_TXT_MINH.
A created note can be deleted by clicking Edit>Delete>Last
Entity.

Result: The notes will be created as specified above.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:201 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LABEL

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:202 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Purpose: To create a Label annotation in the current drawing.


The Label is used to annotate information derived from a model
p-point in the current drawing. It consists of a text or symbol, with
a leader line connected to it and referring to the specific P-point.
The Label is structurally contained within a component of its own,
with a system-unique layer (-11).
Both the colour and the layer on geometry level of the Label are
controlled by the modal properties of the General Note, The Line
type is set to Solid.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:203 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Instructions: In the Annotate menu, click Label.


The Create Label form is displayed.

You can choose the type of label: General or Symbolic. General


Label presents the intelligent text. Symbolic Label is generated
from template (SYTM).
The intelligent text or template name is keyed in on the form.
Optionally there are two selection buttons:

Indicate already created label on drawing and copy text or


symbol template name from that label.

Select intelligent text or symbol from predefined list.

To include intelligent text, click the button, the Intelligent Text


form is displayed:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:204 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

When the Symbolic type of label is chosen, the Symbol Library


form is displayed.
The label is placed on the drawing in the following steps:
First the desired p-point in the drawing is indicated.
Next, the position where to place the label.
Optionally start point of the leader line can be selected, if it
should be different to the previously given P-point.
The Start of Leader Line form is displayed when placing the
label.

The options depend on what type of point was selected in the


first step. If this was a point on a p-line: you can either select any
geometrical point in the drawing (Another point) or give a relative
distance between the start and the end point of the p-line
(Relative distance along P-line). If the point given in the first step
is a p-point the only additional option is a geometrical point.
Please note that if the label starts in a geometrical point the
association to the model will be lost. That means that if the model
is moved the label will not follow.
When the label is positioned in the drawing by the user, clicking
the Options command lets the user change the properties of the
text.
To remove a previously created label, select Edit/Delete/Last
Entity.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:205 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: Options tab.

Leader line shape


The shape of the leader line.
• Straight
• Free bend point
A free point in the drawing is given by the user
• Free angle/Horizontal
The angle of the first part of the line is defined by the user,
the second part is horizontal
• Free angle/Vertical
The angle of the first part of the line is defined by the user,
the second part is vertical
• Horizontal/ Free angle
The angle of the second part of the line is defined by the
user, the first part is horizontal
• Vertical/ Free angle
The angle of the second part of the line is defined by the
user, the first part is vertical
• Disabled (not shown)
The bend angle defines the slope (degrees) of the Free angle
part of the leader line. Valid when using leader line shape with
Free angle option.

Leader line terminator


The type of terminator attached to the leader line.
• Disabled (none)
• Open arrow
• Narrow dart
• Wide dart
• Slash
• Open dot
• Arrow
• Dot

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:206 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

The size field defines size of selected terminator.

Frame
Displays rectangular frame around label text. The margin defines
distance between displayed text and surrounding box.

Blanking
Defines if label shape should blank out parts of the drawing
behind the label. The margin defines offset that increases area
blanked out by label shape.

Defaults: Default values displayed in the dialog can be configured in the


Drafting Default file.
For a list of all keywords used in the Drafting Default file, see
Drafting Default File Keywords in Chapter Appendices.
The Intelligent Text definitions are read from text file assigned to
the logical variable SBD_LABEL_TEXT_DEFINITIONS.

Result: Labels will be created in the current drawing, according to the


user’s actions.

AUTOTAGGING

Autotagging in Marine Drafting is available through the graphical user interface found in
Annotate > Autotagging. The functionality will build up the hierarchy needed for the
view and allows you to create local tagging or library tagging. For more information
about autotagging refer to User Guide / Outfitting Draft / Labelling / Autotagging.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:207 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

MARKUP

Purpose: To create a Markup annotation in the current drawing.


The Markup is used to make the user pay specific attention to a
part of the drawing. It consists of a text enclosed by "cloud"-like
contour, together with a number of reference lines. Each
reference line starts from the edge of the cloud contour and aims
at certain position in the drawing.
The Markup is structurally contained within a component of it's
own, with a system-unique layer (-9).
The colour and line type of the markup is controlled by the
Default Keyword MARKUP_COLOUR and
MARKUP_LINETYPE.
The reference symbol (arrow) at the end of each reference line is
fetched from the symbol font 21 with the symbol number
controlled by the default keyword MARKUP_REF_SYMB_NO.
The height of the reference symbol is controlled by the default
keyword MARKUP_REF_SYMB_HEIGHT.

Instructions: In the Annotation menu, click Markup.


First, the text is keyed in, using a simple editor dialog.
Next, the text is dragged into desired position in the drawing. By
clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to change some
characteristics (height, rotation, aspect, slant, interline space and
font) of the resulting text.
When the text has been positioned, a cloud like contour,
enclosing the text, is automatically created.
See documentation about the CLO component for more details.
Finally, a arbitrary number of reference lines can be attached to
the markup. The aiming position for each reference line is then
given by user. The definition of reference lines is completed by
clicking Operation Complete.

Options: None.

Result: Markups will be created in the current drawing, according to


User's action.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:208 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

RULER

Purpose: To create a ruler in the current drawing.


The ruler consists of a ruler line, ticks along the line and tick
labels every 5:th tick.

Instructions: In the Insert menu, click Ruler.


The starting position of the ruler line is defined by user. By
clicking Options here, it is possible to change some
characteristics (height, aspect and slant) of the resulting tick
labels. To remove a previously created ruler, select
Edit>Delete>Last Entity at this stage.
Next, the minimum and maximum tick values are supplied by
user. Only integer values are accepted.
Finally, the tick unit (distance between two adjacent ticks) is
keyed in by user.
The resulting ruler will start in the given position, grow
horizontally to the right from the minimum to the maximum tick
value. The first and every 5:th tick will be labelled according to
it's value. The total length of the ruler will then be the tick
distance multiplied with the difference between the maximum
and the minimum tick values.

Options: None.

Result: A ruler will be created in the current drawing, according to User's


action.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:209 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

POSITION RULER

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:210 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Purpose: This function creates different kinds of rulers in model views and
generates the complete dimensioning components automatically.
The following types of rulers can be created:
• Base Line (BL)
• Centre Line (CL)
• Frame Ruler (FR)
• Longitudinal Horizontal Ruler (LH)
• Longitudinal Vertical Ruler (LV)
Note that BL and CL are simply the lines of intersection between
the Base/Centre plane and the view plane. Nevertheless, BL and
CL will be referred to as rulers in the following.

Instructions: In the Annotate menu, click Position Ruler.


The model view, the type of ruler to create, the location of the
ruler (not BL/CL) and trimming of the ruler is defined by User, in
that order.

Indicating the Model View:


The model view in which to define the ruler is indicated by User.
Normally, the view plane has to be one of the principal planes,
i.e. perpendicular to any of the cardinal axis; otherwise no ruler
can be presented ambiguously. The exception is when the depth
of the view plane is defined, as in Hull Views; here any
orientation of the view plane will do.
To remove a previously created dimensioning, click
Edit>Delete>Last Entity.

Selecting the type of Ruler:


Once the model view has been defined, the specific ruler to
create in this view is selected from a dialog box. Note that only
those rulers that can be presented ambiguously in the view are
selectable.

Location of the Ruler:


The system prompt is: Locate ruler (OC for positioning in BL/CL).
A skeleton of the ruler is dragged (in direction perpendicular to
the 'ruler' plane) into desired position by User. Note that BL/CL
by definition has a fixed position in the view.
The Frame Ruler is available also in a Body Plan View, however
location is defined differently to other view types. The User is
prompted to define a polyline that intersects the x-curves in the
view. A frame annotation will be added at each intersection.

Trimming the Ruler:


Once located, it is possible to adjust the length of the ruler. This
is done by shortening or extending the ends of the ruler. When
ready, click Operation Complete.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:211 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: A 3D Position ruler will be created in the current drawing,


according to User's action.

COORDINATE AXIS

Purpose: To create coordinate axis for a model view. The coordinate axis
is a sub-picture of its own and consists of the vectors along the
principal axis in positive direction with an arrow at the end and a
text string describing the axis.

Instructions: In the Annotate menu, click Coordinate Axis. Indicate the


Model View for which the coordinate axis should be calculated.
After indication the axis is presented in refresh colour to be
placed by the user.

Options: None.

Result: The coordinate axis representation will be created in the current


drawing, according to the User's action.

PIPE RESTRICTION SYMBOL

Purpose: The Pipe Restriction symbol is used to visualise a restriction in


the display of a pipe. Imagine a straight end cut of a pipe in the
drawing: the restriction symbol will then be placed between the
end points of the two lines.

Instructions: In the Annotate menu, click Pipe Restriction Symbol.


First, the starting position of the symbol is defined by user (as a
node point). To remove a previously created symbol, select
Edit>Delete>Last Entity at this stage.
Secondly, the ending position of the symbol is given (also as a
node point).

Options: None.

Result: Pipe restriction symbols will be created in the current drawing,


according to User's action.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:212 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

GENERAL RESTRICION SYMBOL

Purpose: The Restriction symbol is used to visualise a restriction in the


display of some general geometric entity. The restriction symbol
is created automatically as a contour between two user-defined
positions in the drawing.

Instructions: First, the starting position of the contour is defined by user (as a
node point). To remove a previously created symbol, select
Edit>Delete>Last Entity at this stage.
Secondly, the ending position of the contour is given (also as a
node point).
Now, the resulting contour, built up by a "random" polygon, is
proposed and the user is asked to confirm it. If not accepted, a
spline contour passing through the same nodes as the polygon is
proposed instead and the user is asked to confirm this one.

Options: None.

Result: A general restriction component will be created in the current


drawing, according to User's action.

CROSS

Purpose: The Cross symbol is used to visualise an area of information in


the drawing. It consists of two diagonal lines with a descriptive
text positioned in the diagonal intersection.

Instructions: The start and end positions of first diagonal line is defined by
user. To remove a previously created symbol, select
Edit>Delete>Last Entity at this stage.
Next, the start and end positions of second diagonal line is
defined by user. Here, clicking Operation Complete means
automatic adjustment of the second diagonal line:
• if clicked when defining the start position, the second
diagonal is automatically defined to make the resulting
cross rectangular.
• if clicked when defining the end position, this position will
automatically be defined to make the resting cross semi-
rectangular.
Finally, the descriptive text is keyed in by user. By clicking
Options here, it is possible to change some characteristics
(height, rotation, aspect, slant, interline space and font) of the
resulting text.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:213 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: A cross component will be created in the current drawing,


according to User's action.

CLOUD

Purpose: The Cloud primitive is used to make the user pay attention to an
updated part of the drawing. It consists of a closed contour
making up a "cloud"-like shape.

Instructions: The cloud contour is defined by a user-given closed control


polygon. Along this polygon, a number of consecutive bulges will
be derived, making up the resulting cloud contour. The number of
bulges along each side is controlled by the Default Keyword
CLOUD_BULGE_MAX. Furthermore, the colour and line type of
the cloud is controlled by the default keywords
CLOUD_COLOUR and CLOUD_LINETYPE.
The vertices of the control polygon is given by user, one by one,
and completed by clicking Operation Complete. The polygon
will then automatically be closed by the system. A special case of
the polygon is the axis-parallel rectangle, defined by two
opposite corners. Click Options before giving the first vertex/
corner to toggle between these two ways of defining the polygon.
To remove a previously created cloud, select Edit>Delete>Last
Entity at this stage.
Once the control polygon has been defined, the resulting cloud
contour is automatically created. The number of bulges along the
longest side of the polygon is controlled by the default keyword
CLOUD_BULGE_MAX. The number of bulges along any other
side of the polygon will then be relative to the length of that side,
compared to the length of the longest side.
Finally, 'corner' bulges (i.e. bulges between adjacent polygon
sides) will join 'side' bulge sections (i.e. bulges along a specific
polygon side) into a continuous and closed contour.
It should be mentioned here that the bulge points, i.e. the points
joining adjacent bulges, will be based on a uniform distribution
along each polygon side with a slight random deviation.

Options: None.

Result: A general cloud component will be created in the current


drawing, according to User's action.
remove a previously created cloud, select Edit>Delete>Last
Entity at this stage.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:214 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

MODIFY

MOVE

TEXT

Purpose: To move a text in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Move, then Text.


First, the text to move is indicated by the user.
Next, the text is dragged into desired position in the drawing. By
clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to
• change some characteristics (height, rotation, aspect, slant
and font) of the text.
• define a lock position in u- or v-direction, by indicating
another text as lock reference.
• toggle the auto text positioning status, see Automatic
Positioning of a Text in Chapter Model Viewing and General
Drafting for details.
Once positioned, the system prompts for another text to move.
The interaction is interrupted by clicking Operation Complete.

Options: None.

Result: User-indicated texts are moved within the current drawing.

SYMBOL

Purpose: To move a symbol in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Move, then Symbol.


First, the symbol to move is indicated by the user.
Next, the symbol is dragged into desired position in the drawing.
By clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to
• change some characteristics (height and rotation) of the
symbol.
• mirror the symbol in u- or v-direction
• toggle the "auto symbol positioning" status, see Automatic
Positioning of a Symbol in Chapter Model Viewing and
General Drafting for details.
Once positioned, the system prompts for another symbol to
move. The interaction is interrupted by clicking Operation
Complete.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:215 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: User-indicated symbols are moved within the current drawing.

REFERENCE

Purpose: To move text within certain system components in the current


drawing.
Example of such system components are:
• Notes,
• Position numbers,
• Radius measurements, both straight and knuckled,
• Diameter measurements, both straight and knuckled,
• 3D coordinate measurements, and
• 3D weight and Centre of Gravity measurements.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Move, then Reference.


First, the system component is indicated by the user.
Next, the text within the system component is dragged into
desired new position in the drawing. Once positioned, the
associated reference lines will be adjusted to match the new
position of the text.

Options: None.

Result: References within certain system components are moved in the


current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:216 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

COPY

TEXT

Purpose: To produce copies of a text in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Copy, then Text.


First, the text to copy is indicated by the user.
Next, a copy of the text is dragged into desired position in the
drawing. By clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to
• change some characteristics (height, rotation, aspect, slant
and font) of the resulting text.
• define a lock position in u- or v-direction, by indicating
another text as lock reference.
• toggle the "auto text positioning" status, Automatic
Positioning of a Text in Chapter Model Viewing and General
Drafting for details.
Once positioned, new copies of the selected text can be
positioned repeatedly, until the user interrupts by clicking
Operation Complete. The system will then prompt for another
text to copy The interaction is finished by Operation Complete.

Options: When the system prompts for the text to copy, click Options for
an alternative way to define the source text. It will then be
possible to fetch the text from some general model information or
from a subpicture name.

Result: User-indicated texts are copied within the current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:217 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SYMBOL

Purpose: To produce copies of a symbol in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Copy, then Symbol.


First, the symbol to copy is indicated by the user.
Next, a copy of the symbol is dragged into desired position in the
drawing. By clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to
• change some characteristics (height and rotation) of the
symbol.
• mirror the symbol in u- or v-direction
• toggle the auto symbol positioning status, Automatic
Positioning of a Symbol in Chapter Model Viewing and
General Drafting for details.
Once positioned, new copies of the selected symbol can be
positioned repeatedly, until the user interrupts by clicking
Operation Complete. The system will then prompt for another
symbol to copy. The interaction is finished by Operation
Complete.

Options: None.

Result: User-indicated symbols are copied within the current drawing.

GEOMETRY

Purpose: To produce copies of a general geometric entity in the current


drawing.

Instructions: In Modify menu, click Copy, then Geometry.


The basic interaction and options are the same as in the Modify
/ Transform / GEO function, refer to the documentation of this
function. Perform Transformation in Chapter Model Viewing and
General Drafting for details about how to transform.
Additionally, a simple dialog appears in which the user is
prompted to key in the number of copies to produce. OK without
any number given will be interpreted as one copy and the
transformation of the geometric entity is started in "dynamic
move". If a number is explicitly given, the transformation is
started by prompting the user to chose a transformation activity.
When the transformation is completed (by clicking Operation
Complete), the system responds by creating additional copies,
in case the User specified that more than one copy was required.
All additional copies are transformed according to the user-given
transformation, applied on a copy of the previous produced copy.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:218 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: It is possible to copy all geometric entities inside a user-defined


region, Capture in Chapter Model Viewing and General Drafting
for details. To enter this option, click Options twice when the
system prompts for the geometry to copy.

Result: User-indicated geometric entities are copied within the current


drawing.

SUBPICTURE

Purpose: To enable a User to copy an existing sub-picture within a drawing


to other locations within the drawing.

Instructions: The user can select a sub-picture either by identifying the


subpicture by a left click or selecting the Options button. In the
latter case the system responds with a dialog box in which the
user is required to enter the name of the sub-picture that is to be
copied. The named sub-picture must already exist within the
currently opened and displayed drawing.
The system responds by drawing a rectangular box around the
sub-picture having the name that was input and requests the
User to confirm that the selection is OK. The system then
presents a simple table in which the User is to enter the number
of equally spaced copies that are to be made.
With the cursor locate the position of the first copy by clicking the
left-hand button once to make the copy appear and then drag the
copy to the required position and then fix it there with a further
single click of the left-hand button.
Cursor-select the 'operation complete' icon. The system
responds by creating the additional copies, if the User has
specified that more than one copy was required. Any additional
copies are placed at equal distances apart, equal that is to the
distance from the original to the first copy, and along the line
projected between the original and the first copy. The User will
need to repeat the use of this overall function if non-uniform
spacing is required.

Options: There are no other options within this process.

Result: Copies of sub-pictures are created within the display at the


selected and controlled positions, in addition to the original sub-
picture, and stored within the associated drawing file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:219 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

TRANSFORM

GEOMETRY

Purpose: To transform geometric elements, including text and symbols, in


the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Transform, then Geometry.


First, the geometry to transform is indicated by the user
The process automatically starts in the free-hand translation
mode. For further details, Perform Transformation in Chapter
Model Viewing and General Drafting.
The Transformation tool bar offers several options, namely:
1. Scale
2. Move delta
3. Move two positions
4. Rotate delta
5. Rotate two positions
6. Rotate 45 degrees
7. Rotate 90 degrees
8. Rotate 180 degrees
9. Rotate - 90 degrees
10. Mirror about screen U
11. Mirror about screen V
12. Mirror line
13. Parallel
14. Four positions
15. 'Same as'
16. Along curve
17. Lock U
18. Lock V
19. Centre
20. Form detection

Options: None.

Result: User-indicated geometric entities are transformed within the


current drawing.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:220 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

SUBPICTURE

Purpose: To transform subpictures in the current drawing.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Transform, then Subpicture.


Initially, the user is prompted to indicate the subpicture to
transform. By clicking Options at this stage, the system offers
three alternatives of selecting the subpicture:
• by cursor
• by name
• by envelope
When identified by name, the system will find all subpictures with
the given name at any level (it is supposed that a drawing does
not contain identical subpicture names at different levels). If there
are more that on matching subpicture, the system will proceed by
highlighting them one by one allowing the User accept (Yes) or
deny (No) the proposed subpicture.
The continuing interaction is the same as in the Modify /
Transform / GEO function, refer to the documentation of this
function. Perform Transformation in Chapter Model Viewing and
General Drafting for details about how to transform.

Options: None.

Result: User-indicated subpictures are transformed within the current


drawing.

SCALE

Purpose: The scale way to transform provides two alternatives, namely:


absolute scale, and relative scale.
For example selecting a relative scale of 0.5 doubles the
apparent size of the entity, and 0.25 increases the apparent size
by 4.0 factor. Conversely a relative scale of 5.0 reduces the
apparent size accordingly. Thus the relative scale is the 'original'
entity compared with the 'new'. The absolute scale works directly,
i.e., not the reciprocal.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:221 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

MOVE DELTA

Purpose: The move delta way to transform asks the User to key-in the
offset value to be used for an orthogonal shift of the selected
level entities. Both positive and negative numeric dimensions
can be input for relative U, V coordinate. The orthogonal shift can
be specified by value (for distance) and followed by blank and
letter (for direction). The letter can be L(eft),R(ight), U(p), D(own)
or W(est), E(ast), N(orth), S(outh).

MOVE TWO POSITIONS

Purpose: The move two positions way to transform is used in order to


define a translation by identifying two positions on the screen.
Select any point with the cursor and click the left-hand button.
Then select a second point, with the system creating a line
between the first position and the current position of the cursor,
then click again the left button. These two User-supplied
positions are used by the program to create a vector that controls
the amount and direction of the shift. The 'start position' for this
vector need not be on the graphic object to be moved. The
graphic object will be shown both shifted to the corresponding
new position as well as in the original position when the
Operation Complete icon is clicked. When the 'screen repaint'
icon is clicked then the graphic entity at the original position will
be removed from the display.

ROTATE DELTA

Purpose: The rotate delta way to transform asks the User to key-in the
angle to be used for the rotation about the centre of the selected
graphic object. Both positive and negative angles can be input,
with positive being counter-clockwise.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:222 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

ROTATE TWO POSITIONS

Purpose: The rotate two positions way to transform is used in order to


graphically indicate the angle through which the selected object
is to be rotated, again about its centre. As soon as this icon is
selected, the system assumes a starting point within the selected
object and the User then positions the cursor in order to create
an initial line. As the cursor is being positioned, the system
displays a straight line between the starting point and the current
position of the cursor and the end point is created as soon as the
User clicks the left button. This process is repeated in order to
enable the User establish a second line. The angle and direction
which the object is rotated through, is then determined by the
angle between these two User-established lines

ROTATE 45

Purpose: The rotate 45 degrees way to transform simply rotates the


selected object in a counter-clockwise direction by 45 degrees
about its centre.

ROTATE 90

Purpose: The rotate 90 degrees way to transform simply rotates the


selected object in a counter-clockwise direction by 90 degrees
about its centre.

ROTATE 180

Purpose: The rotate 180 degrees way to transform simply rotates the
selected object in a counter-clockwise direction by 180 degrees
about its centre.

ROTATE -90

Purpose: The rotate -90 degrees way to transform simply rotates the
selected object in a clockwise direction by 90 degrees about its
centre.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:223 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

MIRROR U

Purpose: The mirror about screen U way to transform creates a reflection


of the selected graphic object about a horizontal line through the
current centre of the object, and removes the original from the
display

MIRROR V

Purpose: The mirror about screen V way to transform creates a reflection


of the selected graphic object about a vertical line through the
current centre of the object and removes the original from the
display.

MIRROR LINE

Purpose: The mirror any line way to transform creates a reflection of the
selected graphic object about a user-defined line.

PARALLEL

Purpose: The parallel way to transform enables the User to both rotate
and translate a selected graphic entity in a single combined
action. The User selects first a segment of the graphic entity and
then another segment or line to which the selected segment of
the graphic entity is to be made parallel to. The offset distance, in
either positive or negative directions, from the second segment is
then input from the keyboard, in response to a table that the
system presents to the User. The graphic entity is then translated
to the new position and located so that the line between the two
pivot points will be perpendicular to the segments.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:224 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

TRANSFORM FOUR POSITIONS

Purpose: The four positions way to transform also enables the User to
accomplish a combined translate and rotate operation, through
that effectively combine 'move two positions' and 'rotate two
positions' operations. Using the cursor the User establishes four
positions, or points, on the screen. The system creates a straight
line between the first two points established. Similarly, the
system creates a straight line between the third and forth points
established. The first and third points establish the direction and
magnitude of the translation. The angle the two lines rules the
direction and magnitude of the rotation.

SAME AS

Purpose: The same as way to transform enables the User to signify that a
graphic entity is to be transformed in the same way that another
subpicture has been transformed. This means that two or more,
otherwise independent entities can be transformed in exactly the
same manner.

ALONG CURVE

Purpose: The along curve way to transform enables the User to transform
subpicture along the path defined by curve. The User selects a
curve on the display, then selects the location of the object on the
curve; the object part that will be tangent to the curve and key in
distance along curve.

LOCK U

Purpose: The lock U condition is used in order to ensure that any


translation can only take place in a vertical direction. Locking can
be concurrent with other transformation functions, namely move
dynamic, move two positions, move delta, parallel, same as, and
transform four positions. The locking command should be clicked
immediately before invoking any of these transformation
functions.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:225 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LOCK V

Purpose: The lock V condition is used in order to ensure that any


translation can only take place in a horizontal direction. Locking
can be concurrent with other transformation functions, namely
move dynamic, move two positions, move delta, parallel, same
as, and transform four positions. The locking command should
be clicked immediately before invoking any of these
transformation functions.

CENTRE

Purpose: The Centre Sub function displays the current centre of a graphic
entity. This corresponds to the 'centre of gravity' or rather 'centre
of area', of the graphic element, assuming it to be either an area
or linear object. (This seems to be very questionable for several
graphic elements, particularly simple collections of line
segments, etc.) When the new centre is defined, Operation
complete is needed to confirm new position of the centre.
Subsequently the transformation can be continued.

FORM DETECTION

Purpose: The Form detection option enables the User to obtain a show of
the drawing 'form' that is currently being used, on the graphics
display during transformation operations. This enables the User
to ensure that the results of the transformations remain sensible
within the boundaries of the drawing form.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:226 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

TRIM

TO ENTITY

Purpose: This function facilitates the limitation of user-indicated contours


in the current drawing A contour can be limited to the intersection
with another contour or part of a contour (segment), or to the
intersection with a virtual line through a given point.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Trim, then To Entity.


The order of interaction is of type group trim, i.e. first the
trimming entity is defined, then the contours to trim are indicated,
one by one.

The trimming entity


The interaction starts by asking the user to define the trimming
entity. This entity can be defined in three ways, namely:
• As a point
• As a segment, i.e. a part of a contour
• As a contour
If trim to point, the trimming entity is defined as a virtual line,
passing through a user-defined point and perpendicular to the
contour to trim.
If trim to segment, the trimming segment is indicated by user. It it
also possible to define a virtual segment. If the segment is a line,
it will be considered unrestricted.
If trim to contour, the trimming contour is indicated by user.
The way to define the trimming entity is modal. To change the
trimming entity definition, click Options and select the desired
alternative from a multiple choice dialog.
Once defined, the trimming entity will be highlighted and the
interaction continues by asking the user to indicate the contours
to trim, one by one.

The contours to trim


The contours to trim are indicated, one by one. Each contour will
be trimmed against the trimming entity if possible. Single-
segment contours will be trimmed without confirmation if there is
only one possible trimming alternative. Otherwise, the result of
the trimming operation must be confirmed by user.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:227 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

The trim operation may result in an extended contour. A multiple-


segment contour will always be extended in the end segment,
closest to the user indication. If the segment is an arc, there are
two extension alternatives:
• appending a tangent
• extending the length
This arc extension strategy is modal. To change the strategy,
click Options and select desired alternative.
To define a new trimming entity, click Operation Complete.

Options: None.

Result: User-indicated contours will be shortened or extended according


to User's action

BY LENGTH

Purpose: To enable a User to lengthen or shorten either a straight line or


an arc, currently in a 2-D drawing

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Trim, then By Length.


Cursor select the straight line or arc, locating the cursor at the
end of the line or arc that is to be modified. The system responds
with presenting the User from a multiple choice from which to
select.
1. For straight lines.
The options of new length and delta length can be selected.
If 'new length is selected' then the line is made equal to the
value that is input by the User, determined from the line end
point that was the nearest to the cursor when the line was
selected. The system will not accept negative numbers in
this function.
If 'delta length' is selected then this value is added to the
end of the line that is the furthest away from the end point
that is the closest to the cursor when the line was selected.
The system will accept both positive and negative numbers,
thus enabling the User to stretch/shorten the line relative to
this point.
2. For arcs.
The options of new length and delta length still apply and
have the same result as for the straight line condition, again
using the arc end point that was the closest to the cursor
when the arc was selected.
The option central angle can be selected. The User can
input the required new included angle and the system will
modify the arc accordingly, with the angle being determined
from the end point that was the closest to the cursor when
the arc was selected. The system will not accept negative
angles.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:228 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: None.

Result: Straight lines and arcs will be modified, displayed on the screen
and stored in the drawing file.

GAP

Purpose: To enable a User to make a gap in a geometric entity, (line, arc,


contour, spline, etc.) based on an intersecting geometric entity or
on two intersecting entities, with each entity being currently in a
2-D drawing.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Trim, then Gap.


With the cursor select the entity, (line, arc, or spline, etc.,) in
which the gap is to be created.
With the cursor select the first intersecting entity, (again a line,
arc, or spline, etc.), picking a segment on the entity that is a
close as possible to the intersection point. Repeat this for the
segment on the intersecting entity that is as close as possible to
the second intersection point. Note that the User can select two
different intersecting entities in order to create the gap definition.
The system highlights the gap that is created and enables the
User to accept or reject it.
If the entity, in which the gap is to be introduced, is of a closed
contour form, then the User generally needs to select which part
of the geometric entity to remove. The default is that the shortest
length segment between the two intersection points is removed
and this is what the User required to accept or reject. If he rejects
this then the system requires that he accepts or rejects the other
possible segment, again with the segment that is to be removed
being highlighted. If the User rejects this segment then no gap is
created.

Options: The only options are to reject the gap that is created before it is
incorporated in the definition of the selected entity and to select
the required segment to be removed in order to create a gap in a
closed contour.

Result: A gap is added to the selected entity, based on the User selected
intersecting entities, displayed on the screen and stored in the
drawing file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:229 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CUTOUT

Purpose: To enable a User to incorporate a 'cut out' shape into a geometric


entity definition, (line, arc, contour, spline, etc.) based on an
intersecting geometric entity of the required shape, and with
each entity being currently defined and positioned in a 2-D
drawing

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Trim, then Cutout.


With the cursor select the receiving entity, (line, arc, or spline,
etc.,) in which the 'cut out' geometry is to be incorporated. The
selected entity may have an open or closed definition.
With the cursor select the geometric entity that contains the
definition of the cut out. This geometric entity may also have an
open or closed form. This 'cut out' entity must intersect the
receiving entity at least two points, this being the typical case. If
the system determines that there are more than two intersection
points then the User is request to cursor select the required two
points.
The system will add the cut out geometry to the receiving entity,
automatically making a gap, and highlight the result for the User
to accept or reject. If part of the cut out geometry entity is not
added to the receiving entity then it is deleted, when shown in the
highlighted form.

Options: When either or both the receiving and 'cut out' entities are of
closed contour form, then the User can control the selection of
the relevant portions of each of the entities by accepting or
rejecting the highlighted arrangement shown.

Result: A 'cut out' contour definition is incorporated into the selected


contour entity definition, displayed on the screen and stored in
the drawing file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:230 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

FILLET

Purpose: To create fillets with corresponding trimming, between segments


in 2-D drawings.
(See also Insert / FIL for fillet only operations)

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Trim, then Fillet.


The system will assume the fillet type, in this mode of operation,
that was last used during the connect session and, via a simple
table on the screen, request from the User the relevant
dimension. If the fillet type, as displayed in the upper right-hand
corner of the screen, is not the required type, then by selecting
Options the system will then display in the upper left-hand side
of the screen the three basic fillet geometry options that are
available. With the aid of the cursor and clicking the left button on
the mouse, the required fillet geometry can be selected. The
system presents the User with the table in which to enter, via the
keyboard, the required dimension for the type of fillet selected.
The User should position the cursor very close to, and within, the
corner between the two segments lines where the fillet is to be
created. Following a single click of the left button the system will
create the required fillet between the two segments and
completely trim away the remaining segments of both contours
that are not connected to the fillet.
If the segments are two lines and stop short of one another and
do not actually intersect, then the system will still try to find the
one quadrant that would be bounded by the two lines if they were
to be extended towards the point of theoretical intersection,
however the process still requires the cursor to be positioned
close to the theoretical intersection point. The system will create
the fillet and automatically extend the lines until they connect to
the fillet. (Arc fillets are not yet implemented.)
The system will fail if there is another entity, particularly an arc,
which would be between the fillet and the corner point.
(See also Modify / Trim / FIL for combined fillet and trim
operations)

Options: There are no options, except for the type of fillet, within this
process.

Result: A fillet will be created, and the relevant segments trimmed or


straight lines extended if so required, displayed on the screen
and stored in the drawing file. The colour of the fillet will be black
and the line type will be solid.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:231 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

STRETCH

Purpose: To enable a User to change the shape of geometric objects by


various 'stretching' operations.

Prerequisites: The drawing must be open and currently viewed on the screen.
The display must contain the geometric elements that are to be
stretched. It is the responsibility of the User to determine if the
stretching of an object produces a meaningful shape and the
system does not contain any logic and/or limitations.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Stretch.


On entering this function the User is presented with a multiple
choice dialog box, containing six options, from which he must
make a selection before proceeding any further. The usage of
each option is described in some detail below. The first two
options relate to the local redefinition of a region of a contour,
and the last four relate to any geometric entity or collection of
entities.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:232 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: Option 0. Node


This option allows the User to move a contour node with the
automatic updating of the bounding/neighbour segments.

Option 1. Elbow
This option allows the User to replace a single contour segment
by two adjacent straight-line segments, meeting at a User
defined 'crack' point

Options 2 to 5
These four options require the same graphics screen input from
the User, however the methods whereby the system
accomplishes the 'stretching' operation itself, and then creates
the corresponding result, differ.
Basically the User moves a selected region, in an orthogonal
manner, to a new location on the screen and if required rotates it
in any direction and by any amount, either before or after
translation. Although these simple manipulations will suffice for
many design purposes the User can actually invoke all of the
Transformation functions that are available within the system,
as made available within the function Modify / Transform /
GEO. The system then stretches the connecting geometry,
outside of the selected region, in order to meet with the
transformed region.
The User positions the cursor at an appropriate point and clicks
the Left-hand button once. As he then moves the cursor the
system continuously draws an orthogonal rectangular box with
the previously selected point as one corner and the current
position of the cursor as the diagonally opposite corner. When a
box has been created that covers the region to be transformed
then the User clicks the left-hand button again.
It is most important to note that the lines and other geometric
entities that cross into, and out of, the box are the entities that
are to be eventually stretched by this function, in a manner that
also depends on the type of geometric entity. Hence the User
needs to ensure that geometric entities that are to be
transformed within the box are completely within the box. This
applies to, for example, arcs and circles that may pass out of and
then re-enter the box, as the parts that are outside of the box will
be held fixed and will not be moved as the other parts of the
same element are transformed within the box.
After the User has accepted the position and size of the box, and
has clicked the left-hand button the second time, then a vertical
tool bar appears, offering all of the transformation icons.
After the transformation activity has been completed, the
transformed contents of the box will remain on the screen,
together with the original position of the box and its original
contents. The User should then select the 'operation complete'
icon and the resulting fully-connected 'stretched' structure will
then appear on the screen.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:233 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

The stretching will be according to the option selected. However


while the stretching operation may be fairly predictable for
straight lines that cross the boundary of the User-defined box,
the stretching of curved members and other complex elements
requires some more detailed understanding.
Straight lines, whether single discrete lines or parts of a polyline,
have two end points. The stretching operation, subject to the
following options, is based on these two end points, one will be
within the box and one will be outside of the box. However
complex shapes such as arcs of circles and splines are treated
differently and the external end point for the stretching operation
is based on the initial intersection point between the curve and
the box. Thus, in some such cases the following options will not
be meaningful.

Smooth
Basically, straight lines will be created between the points at
each end of the original line. Thus the line outside of the box is
changed as well as the line inside of the box.

Smooth Inside
A straight line will be created between the line end point within
the box and the point that is the original intersection point
between the line and the non-transformed box. Thus the original
element of the line outside of the box will be unchanged.

Smooth Outside
A straight line is created between the line external end point and
the point on the transformed box that is created by the
intersection between the internal line element and the box. Thus
the element that is within the box is unchanged except for the
transformation itself.

Cracked
A straight line is created between the original intersection point
between the line and the non-transformed box and the
corresponding intersection point on the transformed box. Thus
the structure that is external to the box in its original position is
totally unchanged and the structure that is within the box is only
changed according to the transformation itself, and with straight
lines connecting the pairs of non-transformed and transformed
points at the box intersection points.

Result: The geometry will be modified, both as displayed on the screen


and as stored in the drawing file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:234 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

CHAIN

Purpose: To enable a User to create a geometric chain of adjacent


elements, particularly line, arc, spline, polyline, and contour
elements, such that the resulting chain can be manipulated as a
single continuous element. This function will also enable the
User to create a chain formed from two or more chains.

Prerequisites: The User must ensure that the geometric elements either
connect at their end points with the required adjacent elements in
the anticipated chain or that their respective adjacent ends are
within the established dimensional tolerance, (see Options
below). This function does not recognise elements that do not
either share end points or have end points that are separated by
a distance that exceeds the set tolerance. However gaps are
allowed between the extreme start and end points in the final
chain, i.e. the chain does not need to form a closed loop.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:235 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Chain.


Cursor-select any geometric element that is to become part of
the chain. The system responds by drawing one, two or three
rectangular boxes around all the graphic entities in the region,
according to the previously established sub-picture levels. If the
User wishes to operate only on the information at a specific level
then he will need to use the Appropriate function in order to
display only the graphic information on that level. All items within
the box or boxes are high-lighted and the User must then click
the OK button if he wishes to continue with chaining operations.
Cursor-select a starting or ending element in the intended chain,
and which can be either a line, an arc, a spline, or a contour, etc.
The system needs directional information in order to build-up the
chain from the connecting elements and hence the User should
make the initial cursor selection close to one of the points that
will become either the start point or the end point of the chain.
The direction along the element, and resulting chain, is
determined from the nearest end point on the selected element
to the cursor position.
The system responds by high-lighting the selected element, the
connecting elements that it finds that will form the chain, and
displaying temporary small circles around the terminal end points
of the overall chain. If the selection and ensuing chaining is the
one that was intended, then the User must click the Yes button in
the displayed simple dialog box.
If the displayed end point is not the one that the User intended,
and, generally, it is at a location before the expected end, then
the User will need to examine the connection between the two
elements that otherwise appear to connect together. This can be
done by using the Zoom Up function. If the respective end points
of the two elements are not coincident within the pre-set
tolerance then the system cannot connect the two elements
together in order to continue with the chaining operation.
If more than two elements connect at an end point, or within the
tolerance level, within the length of the intended chain, then the
system will stop the chaining at the branch point and require
input from the User as to which one of the two, or more,
elements that it should then chain along. That is to say that the
system does not know which path to take when it reaches a
branch point. The system displays the optional elements leading
from the branch point and the User must cursor-select the
required one.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:236 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: There are no options within this function.


However a User can allow for elements in a required chain that
do not actually connect, i.e. the chain does not need to be
continuous, by changing the tolerance setting. The tolerance can
be changed through the Format > Defaults function.

Result: A chain of geometric elements is created within the graphic


display and the associated drawing file, and this can then be
treated by the User as a single entity in future operations and
manipulations. An element that is made part of a chain cannot be
individually manipulated nor deleted as long as it is defined as
part of a chain

DECHAIN

Purpose: To enable a User to convert a chain back into its original basic
geometric entities, e.g. back into individual lines and arcs, etc.
This will also apply where the chain to be 'dechained' is a copy of
another chain.

Instructions: In the Tools menu, click Dechain.


Cursor-select any region of the chain to be decomposed back
into its constituent elements. The system responds by high-
lighting the selected chain. If the correct chain is high-lighted
then click the Operation Complete icon.

Options: There are no options within this function.

Result: The selected chain is broken back into the original geometric
entities, without changing their current position or orientation
within the display. Thus if the chain had been manipulated in any
manner after it had been first created, for example translated and
rotated into a new position, then the constituent geometric
components remain in their current position and can be
subsequently manipulated or deleted, if required, as individual
elements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:237 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

PROPERTIES

TEXT

Purpose: To change the properties of existing text.

Instructions: First the kind of properties to change is defined. A multiple


choice dialog Change Text presents the following alternatives:
• Properties
• Rotation
• Contents
The properties to change on subsequent texts are selected in the
dialog, for details see doc of INSERT/TEXT.
Rotation or Contents is supplied by the user.
Next, the texts to modify are indicated one by one.
When modifying Properties, clicking Options flips between
modifying on geometry and subpicture level (or whole drawing if
All is clicked).

Options: None.

Result: Text is changed according to User requirements.

SYMBOL

Purpose: To enable a User to change the properties on an existing symbol


within a display.

Instructions: On selecting this function the User is presented with a multiple


choice Change Symbol box enabling him to change either the
height or the rotation angle of a symbol, or to, if so required, to
change an existing symbol to a wholly different one from within
the set of standard symbols that are available in the overall
project environment.
Depending on the selection that the User makes, he is presented
with another dialog box in which to enter further data, etc., as
described below under Options.
When the input of the relevant change information has been
completed, the User then selects, on the screen and with the
cursor, the symbol that is to be changed and then followed by
clicking the left-hand button.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:238 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Options: The alternatives available to the User are Height, Rotation, and
Symbol.

Height
The system presents the User with a Change Symbol Height
dialog box. This provides the User with four means whereby the
height of a symbol can be changed, namely 'Standard', 'Key- in',
'Same-as' and 'Two positions'.
The selection of 'Standard' means that a subsequently selected
symbol is to be changed back to the originally programmed
standard size. If the User selects 'Key-in' the system presents
him with a simple box in which he is required to key-in the
numeric value of the dimension to be used for the height symbol.
The selection of 'Same as' requires that the User, with the cursor,
identifies the symbol that is to be used to redefine the height of
the symbol that is to be subsequently modified.
If the User selects the 'Two positions' option, then with the aid of
the cursor and at any convenient location on the screen, he is
required to graphically indicate the required height of the symbol.
Position the cursor and click the left-hand button. Drag the cursor
to a new position, with the system drawing a line from the first
position to the current position of the cursor as an aid to the User,
until a point is reached that is considered to be sufficient to
establish the height of the symbol and then again click the left-
hand button.
It is to be noted that however the height is changed, using any of
the above actions, that the overall proportions of the symbol
remain unchanged.

Rotation
The system presents the User with a Change Symbol Rotation
dialog box. This provides the User with four means whereby the
height of a symbol can be changed, namely 'Standard', 'Key- in',
'Same-as' and 'Two positions'.
The inputs from the User for each of these actions are very
similar to the corresponding 'Change Symbol Height' actions.

Symbol
The system presents the User with a Symbol Selection dialog
box. By changing the Font number, using the simple drop-down
list, and horizontally scrolling through the range of alternative
symbols that are associated with each font number, the User can
interactively search for and find the symbol that he requires.
With the cursor select the required symbol and click the Left-
hand button on the mouse. The system responds by drawing a
box around the selected symbol. If the required symbol has been
'seen' by the system, the User must then click the OK key in the
dialog box.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:239 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Result: Symbols are changed according to User requirements.

DIMENSION

Purpose: To enable the User to modify the arrangement of existing


dimensioning.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Dimension.


The system displays a multiple choice dialog box containing
various options, as reviewed below, and from which the User can
make one or more selections that can be used until the required
dimensioning arrangement is achieved.

1. Move Dimension Line


Selecting this option returns the User to the graphic display and
he is able to drag, with the cursor, the basic dimension line to a
new position. The movement is constrained to be parallel to the
original line. Position the cursor over the line, click the left button
and then drag the displayed copy of the line to the required new
position. Click the left button again in order to fix it in position,
simultaneously deleting the old line. Note that the dimension
value text is moved to the new line position and the dimension
associating lines also modified accordingly.
Operation complete returns the User to the multiple choice
dialog box. This also applies to all of the following options.

2. Slant Witness Line


Selecting this option returns the User to the graphic display and
he is able to indicate point aside from the reference line. The
dimension will slant and the reference line will pass through this
point.

3. Presentation
Selecting this option returns the User to the graphic display and
he is able to indicate any element of a particular dimension
construct if he wishes to change the basic form of presentation.
The system responds by highlighting the selected dimension
construct and simultaneously displaying in four boxes the
alternative presentation forms available within the system.
Select the required presentation format. The system changes the
format immediately when the first or the second format is
chosen. For the rest two formats the User has to indicate a side
of dimension text. Select another dimension to format or click
Operation complete to finish the sub function.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:240 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

4. Text Properties
This sub-function lets the user change the text properties in a
dimensioning. It is also possible to change the properties of
individual texts in a linear multi-dimensioning (i.e. containing
several measure texts).
Initially, the system asks the user to indicate the dimension to
update. Click Options to modify individual texts in a linear multi-
dimensioning. After indicating the dimensioning, or the specific
dimension text to modify, the system displays the Text Property
Dialogue showing the current properties of selected item.
After making the desired changes in the dialog, click OK to
update the selected dimensioning with the new properties.

Note: This function is applicable on linear, radius, diameter and


angular dimensionings.

5. Edit Dimension Text


This subfunction lets the user change the value of the dimension
text in a dimensioning component (corresponding to the
Dimension Text field in e.g. the Linear Dimensioning
dialogue). It is also possible to change the value of individual
texts in a linear multi-dimensioning (i.e. containing several
measure texts).
Initially, the system asks the user to indicate the dimension to
update. Click Options to modify individual texts in a linear multi-
dimensioning. After indicating the dimensioning, or the specific
dimension text to modify, the system displays the current value in
the Text Edit dialog. After changing the value, click OK to update
the selected dimensioning.
When editing an individual dimension text in a linear
dimensioning, it is possible to flip between the “intelligent”
(original) text and the evaluated text as the predefined value in
the Edit Text dialog by clicking the Options button. Note that the
Options button will be enabled only if the evaluated text differs
from the “intelligent” text.

Note: This function is applicable on linear, radius, diameter and


angular dimensionings.

6. Move Dimension Text


This sub-function lets the user move an individual text in a linear
dimensioning of type "normal" or "chain" to an arbitrary position.
In case the user indicates a dimensioning other than above
mentioned the text can still be moved but the difference is that
the new position will not be persisted, implying that a sub-
sequent re-evaluation from PADD will undo the modification.
The system asks the user to indicate the dimension text to move,
whereafter the selected text is dragged into desired new position.

Note: This function is applicable on linear, radius, diameter and


angular dimensionings.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:241 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

7. Flip Arrow
This simple option can be used to flip the direction of an
arrowhead and to position it on the opposite side of the
dimension associating lines.
Indicate the arrowhead and click the left-hand button. The
selected arrowhead is immediately reversed and re-positioned.

Options: None.

Result: The arrangement of dimensions within a display, and the


associated drawing file, can be modified in order to improve the
overall presentation and to avoid conflicts with other entities
within the drawing.

Note:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:242 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

LABEL

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:243 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Operator’s Instructions Drafting

Purpose: To enable the User to modify the arrangement of existing


Labels.

Instructions: In the Modify menu, click Label.


The system displays a multiple choice dialog box containing
various options, as reviewed below, and from which the user
can make one or more selections that can be used until the
required label arrangement is achieved.

1. Move
Selecting this option returns the user to the graphic display
and he is able to indicate any element of a particular label
construct if he wishes to change the position of the label text
by dragging it into a new position. Position the cursor over
the text, click the left button and then drag the text to the
required new position. Click the left button again in order to
fix the text in position and update the Label.
Operation complete returns the user to the multiple choice
dialog box. This also applies to all of the following options.

2. Rotate
Selecting this option returns the user to the graphic display
and then it is possible to indicate any element of a particular
label construct and to change the rotation of the label text.
The way to define the text rotation is then selected by the
user, where after the new rotation is given in interaction with
the system. Once given, the Label is updated with the new
text rotation.

3. Text Properties
Selecting this option returns the user to the graphic display
and he is able to indicate any element of a particular label
construct if he wishes to change the properties of the label
text, such as font, height, aspect, colour etc. The system
responds by highlighting the selected label and displaying
the Text Property dialog showing the current properties of
the label text.
After making the desired changes in the dialogue, click OK
to update the selected label with the new properties.

4. Text Value
Selecting this option returns the user to the graphic display
and he is able to indicate any element of a particular label
construct if he wishes to change the value of the label text.
The system responds by highlighting the selected label and
displaying the current value in the Text Edit dialogue.
After making the desired changes in the dialogue, click OK
to update the selected label with the new text value.

© Copyright 1974 to current year.